CN115793858A - Touch module and electronic equipment system - Google Patents

Touch module and electronic equipment system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
CN115793858A
CN115793858A CN202211555441.9A CN202211555441A CN115793858A CN 115793858 A CN115793858 A CN 115793858A CN 202211555441 A CN202211555441 A CN 202211555441A CN 115793858 A CN115793858 A CN 115793858A
Authority
CN
China
Prior art keywords
touch
assembly
component
module
positioning
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
CN202211555441.9A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Inventor
晏菽
张海沫
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd
Original Assignee
Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd filed Critical Guangdong Oppo Mobile Telecommunications Corp Ltd
Priority to CN202211555441.9A priority Critical patent/CN115793858A/en
Publication of CN115793858A publication Critical patent/CN115793858A/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current

Links

Images

Landscapes

  • Position Input By Displaying (AREA)

Abstract

本申请提供了一种触控模组、电子设备系统,所述触控模组包括安装支架以及设于所述安装支架上的触控组件;其中,安装支架包括相对设置的第一板体和第二板体,触控组件可拆卸地装配于第一板体背离第二板体的一侧,并可在第一板体靠近第二板体的一侧实现触控操作。本申请实施例提供的触控模组、电子设备系统,通过设置触控模组与处理设备相配合来控制可穿戴设备的显示屏的显示内容,即在处理设备与可穿戴设备配合使用时,可以在处理设备的触控屏上实现盲控的操作体验。

Figure 202211555441

The present application provides a touch module and an electronic equipment system. The touch module includes a mounting bracket and a touch component disposed on the mounting bracket; wherein, the mounting bracket includes a first board and a The second board body, the touch component is detachably assembled on the side of the first board body away from the second board body, and can realize the touch operation on the side of the first board body close to the second board body. The touch module and electronic device system provided in the embodiment of the present application control the display content of the display screen of the wearable device by setting the touch module to cooperate with the processing device, that is, when the processing device is used in conjunction with the wearable device, A blind control operation experience can be realized on the touch screen of the processing device.

Figure 202211555441

Description

触控模组、电子设备系统Touch module, electronic equipment system

技术领域technical field

本申请涉及电子设备结构的技术领域,具体是涉及一种触控模组、电子设备系统。The present application relates to the technical field of electronic equipment structure, in particular to a touch module and electronic equipment system.

背景技术Background technique

随着触控技术的蓬勃发展,例如手机、笔记本电脑、平板电脑等电子设备的触控装置由于提供了直觉式的操作与输入接口而受到消费者的欢迎。然而,尽管触控屏为消费者提供了软件上的操作便捷,但无法提供实体的触觉反馈,在一定程度上不利于提升用户使用体验。With the vigorous development of touch technology, touch devices of electronic equipment such as mobile phones, notebook computers, and tablet computers are welcomed by consumers because they provide intuitive operation and input interfaces. However, although touch screens provide consumers with convenient software operations, they cannot provide physical tactile feedback, which is not conducive to improving user experience to a certain extent.

发明内容Contents of the invention

本申请实施例一方面提供了一种触控模组,所述触控模组包括安装支架以及设于所述安装支架上的触控组件;其中,所述安装支架包括相对设置的第一板体和第二板体,所述触控组件可拆卸地装配于所述第一板体背离所述第二板体的一侧,并可在所述第一板体靠近所述第二板体的一侧实现触控操作。An embodiment of the present application provides a touch module on the one hand, the touch module includes a mounting bracket and a touch component disposed on the mounting bracket; wherein, the mounting bracket includes a first board opposite to body and a second board body, the touch assembly is detachably assembled on the side of the first board body away from the second board body, and can be close to the second board body on the first board body Touch operation is realized on one side.

本申请实施例另一方面还提供了一种电子设备系统,所述电子设备系统包括处理设备、可穿戴设备以及触控模组,所述处理设备具有触控屏;所述可穿戴设备具有显示屏;所述触控模组可拆卸地装配于所述处理设备上;其中,所述触控模组包括安装支架以及设于所述安装支架上的触控组件;所述安装支架包括相对设置的第一板体和第二板体,所述触控组件可拆卸地装配于所述第一板体背离所述第二板体的一侧;所述处理设备具有由所述处理设备的相邻两边围设形成的角部区域,所述角部区域设于所述第一板体和所述第二板体之间;所述触控组件可在所述第一板体靠近所述第二板体的一侧作用于所述触控屏位于所述角部区域的部分以实现触控操作;所述可穿戴设备可与所述处理设备信号连接,以使得所述触控模组在作用于所述触控屏时可控制所述显示屏的显示内容。Another aspect of the embodiment of the present application provides an electronic device system, the electronic device system includes a processing device, a wearable device and a touch module, the processing device has a touch screen; the wearable device has a display screen; the touch module is detachably assembled on the processing device; wherein, the touch module includes a mounting bracket and a touch component arranged on the mounting bracket; the mounting bracket includes a relative arrangement The first board body and the second board body, the touch assembly is detachably assembled on the side of the first board body away from the second board body; the processing device has a corresponding A corner area is formed adjacent to both sides, and the corner area is provided between the first board and the second board; the touch component can be located near the first board One side of the second plate acts on the part of the touch screen located in the corner area to realize touch operation; the wearable device can be connected with the processing device signal, so that the touch module When acting on the touch screen, the display content of the display screen can be controlled.

本申请实施例提供的触控模组、电子设备系统,通过设置触控模组与处理设备相配合来控制可穿戴设备的显示屏的显示内容,即在处理设备与可穿戴设备配合使用时,可以在处理设备的触控屏上实现盲控的操作体验。此外,将触控模组设于处理设备的角部区域便于用户操作。The touch module and electronic device system provided in the embodiment of the present application control the display content of the display screen of the wearable device by setting the touch module to cooperate with the processing device, that is, when the processing device is used in conjunction with the wearable device, A blind control operation experience can be realized on the touch screen of the processing device. In addition, the touch module is disposed at the corner area of the processing device to facilitate user operation.

附图说明Description of drawings

为了更清楚地说明本申请实施例中的技术方案,下面将对实施例描述中所需要使用的附图作简单地介绍,显而易见地,下面描述中的附图仅仅是本申请的一些实施例,对于本领域普通技术人员来讲,在不付出创造性劳动的前提下,还可以根据这些附图获得其他的附图。In order to more clearly illustrate the technical solutions in the embodiments of the present application, the drawings that need to be used in the description of the embodiments will be briefly introduced below. Obviously, the drawings in the following description are only some embodiments of the present application. For those skilled in the art, other drawings can also be obtained based on these drawings without creative effort.

图1图1是本申请一些实施例中触控组件的结构示意图;FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a touch component in some embodiments of the present application;

图2是图1实施例中触控组件的截面结构示意图;Fig. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional structure diagram of the touch component in the embodiment of Fig. 1;

图3是图2实施例中触控组件与电子设备配合时的结构示意图;Fig. 3 is a schematic structural view of the touch assembly in the embodiment of Fig. 2 when it cooperates with the electronic device;

图4是本申请一些实施例中第一磁性件和第二磁性件分布示意图;Fig. 4 is a schematic diagram of the distribution of the first magnetic part and the second magnetic part in some embodiments of the present application;

图5是本申请一些实施例中触控组件的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 5 is a schematic diagram of the structure disassembly of the touch component in some embodiments of the present application;

图6是图5实施例中触控组件的另一视角的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 6 is a schematic disassembly diagram of another view angle of the touch component in the embodiment of Fig. 5;

图7是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件的截面结构示意图;Fig. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional structure diagram of a touch component in another embodiment of the present application;

图8是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件在初始状态的结构示意图;Fig. 8 is a schematic structural diagram of a touch component in an initial state in another embodiment of the present application;

图9是图8实施例中触控组件在按压状态的结构示意图;FIG. 9 is a schematic structural view of the touch component in the pressed state in the embodiment of FIG. 8;

图10是图8实施例中触控组件与电子设备配合的结构示意图;FIG. 10 is a schematic structural diagram of the cooperation between the touch component and the electronic device in the embodiment of FIG. 8;

图11是图8实施例中触控组件的结构拆分示意图;FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram of a disassembled structure of the touch component in the embodiment of FIG. 8;

图12是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件在初始状态的结构示意图;Fig. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of the touch component in an initial state in other embodiments of the present application;

图13是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 13 is a schematic diagram of the structure disassembly of the touch component in other embodiments of the present application;

图14是图13实施例中触控组件另一视角的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 14 is a schematic disassembly diagram of another viewing angle of the touch component in the embodiment of Fig. 13;

图15是图13实施例中触控组件在初始状态的结构示意图;FIG. 15 is a schematic structural view of the touch component in the initial state of the embodiment in FIG. 13;

图16是图13实施例中触控组件在按压状态的结构示意图;FIG. 16 is a schematic structural view of the touch component in the pressed state in the embodiment of FIG. 13;

图17是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 17 is a schematic diagram of the structural disassembly of touch components in other embodiments of the present application;

图18是图17实施例中触控组件的截面结构示意图;Fig. 18 is a schematic cross-sectional structure diagram of the touch component in the embodiment of Fig. 17;

图19是图18实施例中触控组件与电子设备配合时的结构示意图;Fig. 19 is a schematic structural view of the touch assembly in the embodiment of Fig. 18 when it cooperates with the electronic device;

图20是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件的截面结构示意图;Fig. 20 is a schematic cross-sectional structure diagram of a touch component in another embodiment of the present application;

图21是图18实施例中第一磁性件和第二磁性件的分布示意图;Fig. 21 is a schematic diagram of the distribution of the first magnetic part and the second magnetic part in the embodiment of Fig. 18;

图22是本申请另一些实施例中归位组件的分布示意图;Fig. 22 is a schematic diagram of distribution of homing components in other embodiments of the present application;

图23是本申请一些实施例中电子设备的结构示意图;Fig. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device in some embodiments of the present application;

图24是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备的结构示意框图;Fig. 24 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of electronic equipment in other embodiments of the present application;

图25是本申请一些实施例中电子设备系统的结构示意图;Fig. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device system in some embodiments of the present application;

图26是本申请一些实施例中触控模组的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 26 is a schematic diagram of a disassembled structure of a touch module in some embodiments of the present application;

图27是本申请一些实施例中第二触控组件的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 27 is a schematic diagram of a disassembled structure of a second touch component in some embodiments of the present application;

图28是本申请另一些实施例中装配件的结构示意图;Fig. 28 is a schematic structural view of an assembly in another embodiment of the present application;

图29是本申请另一些实施例中装配件的结构示意图;Fig. 29 is a schematic structural view of an assembly in another embodiment of the present application;

图30是本申请另一些实施例中触控模组的结构示意图;Fig. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of a touch module in other embodiments of the present application;

图31是图30实施例中触控模组的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 31 is a schematic diagram of disassembly of the structure of the touch module in the embodiment of Fig. 30;

图32是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统的结构示意图;Fig. 32 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device system in another embodiment of the present application;

图33是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统的结构示意图;Fig. 33 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device system in another embodiment of the present application;

图34是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统的结构示意图;Fig. 34 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device system in another embodiment of the present application;

图35是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统的结构示意图;Fig. 35 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device system in another embodiment of the present application;

图36是图35实施例中电子设备系统的一状态示意图;Fig. 36 is a schematic diagram of a state of the electronic equipment system in the embodiment of Fig. 35;

图37是图35实施例中电子设备系统的另一状态示意图;Fig. 37 is a schematic diagram of another state of the electronic equipment system in the embodiment of Fig. 35;

图38是本申请一些实施例中触控屏拍摄功能界面示意图;Fig. 38 is a schematic diagram of a touch screen shooting function interface in some embodiments of the present application;

图39是触控模组作用于触控屏实现拍摄功能的效果示意图;Fig. 39 is a schematic diagram of the effect of the touch module acting on the touch screen to realize the shooting function;

图40是本申请一些实施例中电子设备的控制方法的流程示意图;Fig. 40 is a schematic flowchart of a method for controlling an electronic device in some embodiments of the present application;

图41是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统的结构示意图;Fig. 41 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device system in another embodiment of the present application;

图42是图41实施例中电子设备系统的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 42 is a schematic diagram of a disassembled structure of the electronic equipment system in the embodiment of Fig. 41;

图43是本申请一些实施例中触控组件的一状态示意图;Fig. 43 is a schematic diagram of a state of a touch component in some embodiments of the present application;

图44是图43实施例中触控组件的另一状态示意图;Fig. 44 is a schematic diagram of another state of the touch component in the embodiment of Fig. 43;

图45是本申请一些实施例中触控组件的结构拆分示意图;Fig. 45 is a schematic diagram of a disassembled structure of a touch component in some embodiments of the present application;

图46是图45实施例中按键的结构示意图;Fig. 46 is a schematic structural diagram of the button in the embodiment of Fig. 45;

图47是图45实施例中安装件的结构示意图;Fig. 47 is a schematic structural view of the mounting part in the embodiment of Fig. 45;

图48是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件的结构拆分示意图;FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram of a disassembled structure of a touch component in another embodiment of the present application;

图49是图48实施例中安装件的结构示意图;Fig. 49 is a schematic structural view of the mounting part in the embodiment of Fig. 48;

图50是本申请一些实施例中装配支架的结构示意图;Fig. 50 is a schematic structural view of an assembly bracket in some embodiments of the present application;

图51是本申请一些实施例中触控组件的部分结构拆分示意图;Fig. 51 is a schematic diagram of partial structural disassembly of touch components in some embodiments of the present application;

图52是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件的部分结构示意图;Fig. 52 is a partial structural schematic diagram of a touch component in another embodiment of the present application;

图53是本申请一些实施例中电子设备系统的使用场景示意图;Fig. 53 is a schematic diagram of usage scenarios of the electronic device system in some embodiments of the present application;

图54是本申请一些实施例中电子设备系统的部分结构示意图;Fig. 54 is a partial structural diagram of an electronic device system in some embodiments of the present application;

图55是本申请一些实施例中处理设备的使用状态示意图;Fig. 55 is a schematic diagram of the use status of processing equipment in some embodiments of the present application;

图56是本申请一些实施例中电子设备系统的使用状态示意图;Fig. 56 is a schematic diagram of the use state of the electronic device system in some embodiments of the present application;

图57是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统的使用状态示意图;Fig. 57 is a schematic diagram of the use state of the electronic equipment system in other embodiments of the present application;

图58是本申请一些实施例中触控模组的结构示意图;Fig. 58 is a schematic structural diagram of a touch module in some embodiments of the present application;

图59是本申请一些实施例中安装支架的结构示意图;Figure 59 is a schematic structural view of the mounting bracket in some embodiments of the present application;

图60是本申请一些实施例中触控模组的部分结构拆分示意图;Fig. 60 is a schematic diagram of partial structural disassembly of the touch module in some embodiments of the present application;

图61是本申请另一些实施例中可穿戴设备的结构示意框图;Fig. 61 is a schematic block diagram of the structure of a wearable device in another embodiment of the present application;

图62是图61实施例中可穿戴设备的另一结构示意图;Fig. 62 is another structural schematic diagram of the wearable device in the embodiment of Fig. 61;

图63是图61实施例中可穿戴设备的另一结构示意图;Fig. 63 is another structural schematic diagram of the wearable device in the embodiment of Fig. 61;

图64是图63实施例中主机单元的结构示意图。Fig. 64 is a schematic structural diagram of the host unit in the embodiment of Fig. 63.

具体实施方式Detailed ways

下面结合附图和实施例,对本申请作进一步的详细描述。特别指出的是,以下实施例仅用于说明本申请,但不对本申请的范围进行限定。同样的,以下实施例仅为本申请的部分实施例而非全部实施例,本领域普通技术人员在没有做出创造性劳动前提下所获得的所有其它实施例,都属于本申请保护的范围。The application will be described in further detail below in conjunction with the accompanying drawings and embodiments. In particular, the following examples are only used to illustrate the present application, but not to limit the scope of the present application. Likewise, the following embodiments are only some of the embodiments of the present application but not all of them, and all other embodiments obtained by those skilled in the art without creative efforts fall within the protection scope of the present application.

在本文中提及“实施例”意味着,结合实施例描述的特定特征、结构或特性可以包含在本申请的至少一个实施例中。在说明书中的各个位置出现该短语并不一定均是指相同的实施例,也不是与其它实施例互斥的独立的或备选的实施例。本领域技术人员显式地和隐式地理解的是,本文所描述的实施例可以与其它实施例相结合。Reference herein to an "embodiment" means that a particular feature, structure, or characteristic described in connection with the embodiment can be included in at least one embodiment of the present application. The occurrences of this phrase in various places in the specification are not necessarily all referring to the same embodiment, nor are separate or alternative embodiments mutually exclusive of other embodiments. It is understood explicitly and implicitly by those skilled in the art that the embodiments described herein can be combined with other embodiments.

作为在此使用的“电子设备”(或简称为“终端”)包括,但不限于被设置成经由有线线路连接(如经由公共交换电话网络(PSTN)、数字用户线路(DSL)、数字电缆、直接电缆连接,以及/或另一数据连接/网络)和/或经由(例如,针对蜂窝网络、无线局域网(WLAN)、诸如DVB-H网络的数字电视网络、卫星网络、AM-FM广播发送器,以及/或另一通信终端的)无线接口接收/发送通信信号的装置。被设置成通过无线接口通信的通信终端可以被称为“无线通信终端”、“无线终端”或“移动终端”。移动终端的示例包括,但不限于卫星或蜂窝电话;可以组合蜂窝无线电电话与数据处理、传真以及数据通信能力的个人通信系统(PCS)终端;可以包括无线电电话、寻呼机、因特网/内联网接入、Web浏览器、记事簿、日历以及/或全球定位系统(GPS)接收器的PDA;以及常规膝上型和/或掌上型接收器或包括无线电电话收发器的其它电子装置。手机即为配置有蜂窝通信模块的电子设备。"Electronic equipment" (or simply "terminal") as used herein includes, but is not limited to, configured to direct cable connection, and/or another data connection/network) and/or via (for example, for cellular networks, wireless local area networks (WLAN), digital television networks such as DVB-H networks, satellite networks, AM-FM broadcast transmitters , and/or a device for receiving/sending communication signals via a wireless interface of another communication terminal. A communication terminal arranged to communicate over a wireless interface may be referred to as a "wireless communication terminal", "wireless terminal" or "mobile terminal". Examples of mobile terminals include, but are not limited to, satellite or cellular telephones; Personal Communications Systems (PCS) terminals that may combine cellular radiotelephones with data processing, facsimile, and data communication capabilities; may include radiotelephones, pagers, Internet/Intranet access , a PDA with a web browser, organizer, calendar, and/or Global Positioning System (GPS) receiver; and a conventional laptop and/or palm-type receiver or other electronic device including a radiotelephone transceiver. A mobile phone is an electronic device equipped with a cellular communication module.

需要说明的是,本申请中的电子设备主要是针对具有触控屏的电子设备,例如可以是利用触控屏实现电子设备直觉式的操作和输入接口。其中,本申请中的电子设备可以是平板电脑、手机、照相机、个人计算机、笔记本电脑、车载设备、可穿戴设备等具有镜头组件的智能设备。It should be noted that the electronic device in this application mainly refers to the electronic device with a touch screen, for example, the touch screen may be used to realize the intuitive operation and input interface of the electronic device. Wherein, the electronic device in this application may be a tablet computer, a mobile phone, a camera, a personal computer, a notebook computer, a vehicle-mounted device, a wearable device, and other smart devices with a lens assembly.

其中,触控屏可以根据触控感测方式分为电容式触控屏和电阻式触控屏。电容式触控屏主要是利用手指或者导电物体来触碰触控屏,以使触控电极的等效电容改变,进而使得感测电路可以根据触控电极的等效电容的改变来判断触控屏被触碰的位置。电阻式电容屏主要是透过按压触控屏的方式来改变触控屏上的相应位置的电阻值,感测电路可以根据电阻值的改变来判断触控屏被接触按压的位置。Wherein, touch screens can be classified into capacitive touch screens and resistive touch screens according to touch sensing methods. The capacitive touch screen mainly uses fingers or conductive objects to touch the touch screen to change the equivalent capacitance of the touch electrode, so that the sensing circuit can judge the touch control according to the change of the equivalent capacitance of the touch electrode. The location where the screen is touched. The resistive capacitive touch screen mainly changes the resistance value of the corresponding position on the touch screen by pressing the touch screen, and the sensing circuit can judge the pressed position of the touch screen according to the change of the resistance value.

可以理解的,触控屏为电子设备的操作和输入提供了非常大的便利,但是无法提供实体的触觉反馈。然而,在需要提供触觉反馈的电子设备的使用场景下,往往需要提供其他的硬件产品配合电子设备使用。基于此,申请人探索将电子设备作为实现核心功能的载体,配合一种或者多种不同形态的实体控件,实现其他设备所具有的触觉使用体验。Understandably, the touch screen provides great convenience for the operation and input of electronic devices, but cannot provide physical tactile feedback. However, in a usage scenario of an electronic device that needs to provide tactile feedback, it is often necessary to provide other hardware products to cooperate with the electronic device. Based on this, the applicant explores using electronic devices as a carrier to realize core functions, and cooperates with one or more physical controls of different forms to realize the tactile experience of other devices.

触控组件100Touch component 100

请参阅图1至图3,图1是本申请一些实施例中触控组件100的结构示意图,图2是图1实施例中触控组件100的截面结构示意图,图3是图2实施例中触控组件100与电子设备800配合时的结构示意图。Please refer to FIG. 1 to FIG. 3, FIG. 1 is a schematic structural diagram of a touch component 100 in some embodiments of the present application, FIG. 2 is a schematic cross-sectional structure diagram of a touch component 100 in the embodiment of FIG. 1, and FIG. A schematic diagram of the structure of the touch component 100 when it cooperates with the electronic device 800 .

其中,触控组件100可以用于具有触控屏810的电子设备800上,以使得该电子设备800可以提供具有触觉使用体验的操作和输入。可以理解的,电子设备800可以为手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、可穿戴设备等装置,本申请实施例中电子设备可以手机为例进行示例性的说明。Wherein, the touch component 100 can be used on an electronic device 800 with a touch screen 810, so that the electronic device 800 can provide operation and input with tactile experience. It can be understood that the electronic device 800 may be a device such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, or a wearable device. In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 800 may be described using a mobile phone as an example.

触控组件100可以包括定位件110和旋钮120,旋钮120设于定位件110上并能够相对于定位件110转动,以实现档位旋转选择。触控组件100通过设置旋钮120相对于定位件110转动来实现档位选择功能。其中,定位件110用于将触控组件100装配于电子设备800上,以使得旋钮120可作用于电子设备800的触控屏810,从而实现实体旋钮功能。The touch control assembly 100 may include a positioning member 110 and a knob 120 , the knob 120 is disposed on the positioning member 110 and can rotate relative to the positioning member 110 to realize gear rotation selection. The touch control assembly 100 implements the gear selection function by rotating the setting knob 120 relative to the positioning member 110 . Wherein, the positioning member 110 is used to assemble the touch component 100 on the electronic device 800, so that the knob 120 can act on the touch screen 810 of the electronic device 800, thereby realizing the function of a physical knob.

其中,定位件110可拆卸地装配于电子设备800上,进而实现触控组件100与电子设备800可拆卸装配。在触控组件100装配于电子设备800上时,旋钮120可以作用于电子设备800的触控屏810以实现触控操作。即旋钮120相对于定位件110转动即可认为相对于触控屏810转动,与此同时,旋钮120作用于触控屏810并在触控屏810上形成相应的运动轨迹以实现触控操作,从而实现选择档位选择功能。Wherein, the positioning member 110 is detachably assembled on the electronic device 800 , so as to realize the detachable assembly of the touch component 100 and the electronic device 800 . When the touch component 100 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the knob 120 can act on the touch screen 810 of the electronic device 800 to realize touch operation. That is, the rotation of the knob 120 relative to the positioning member 110 can be regarded as rotation relative to the touch screen 810. At the same time, the knob 120 acts on the touch screen 810 and forms a corresponding motion track on the touch screen 810 to realize the touch operation. Thereby, the selection gear selection function is realized.

在一实施例中,触控组件100可以包括第一磁性件130和第二磁性件140,第一磁性件130和第二磁性件140相配合以定位旋钮120的转动角度。其中,定位件110和旋钮120中的一者上设有第一磁性件130、另一者上设有第二磁性件140,第一磁性件130可以设有若干个。在旋钮120相对于定位件110转动时,第二磁性件140能够与若干个第一磁性件130中的部分第一磁性件130相吸以定位旋钮120的转动角度。In an embodiment, the touch control assembly 100 may include a first magnetic member 130 and a second magnetic member 140 , and the first magnetic member 130 and the second magnetic member 140 cooperate to position the rotation angle of the knob 120 . Wherein, one of the positioning member 110 and the knob 120 is provided with a first magnetic member 130 , and the other is provided with a second magnetic member 140 , and several first magnetic members 130 may be provided. When the knob 120 rotates relative to the positioning component 110 , the second magnetic component 140 can attract some of the first magnetic components 130 to position the rotation angle of the knob 120 .

以第一磁性件130设于定位件110、第二磁性件140设于旋钮120上为例,旋钮120具有转动轴线L。可以理解的,转动轴线L为虚拟线条,并非触控组件100上的结构线条,通过转动轴线L可以示意出旋钮120转动的中心线,以便于下文进行相应的描述。Taking the first magnetic member 130 disposed on the positioning member 110 and the second magnetic member 140 disposed on the knob 120 as an example, the knob 120 has a rotation axis L. As shown in FIG. It can be understood that the rotation axis L is a virtual line, not a structural line on the touch component 100 , and the rotation center line of the knob 120 can be indicated by the rotation axis L, so as to facilitate the corresponding description below.

其中,若干个第一磁性件130环绕于旋钮120的转动轴线L的外围设置,在旋钮120转动过程中,第二磁性件140可以与部分第一磁性件130正对并相互吸引,由此可以将旋钮120定位在特定的角度。Wherein, a plurality of first magnetic parts 130 are arranged around the periphery of the rotation axis L of the knob 120. During the rotation of the knob 120, the second magnetic parts 140 can face and attract some of the first magnetic parts 130, thereby enabling Position the knob 120 at a specific angle.

例如,第一磁性件130具有4个并均匀分布于转动轴线L的外围,第二磁性件140设有1个。定义旋钮120在初始位置时,第二磁性件140与4个第一磁性件130中的一个相对并相吸以将旋钮120固定于初始位置。旋钮120受到外力作用相对于定位件110转动时,旋钮120每转动90°,第二磁性件140可与4个第一磁性件130中的一个相对并相吸以定位旋钮120的转动角度,即4个第一磁性件130和1个第二磁性件140相配合可以使得旋钮120实现4个旋转档位的选择功能。For example, there are four first magnetic parts 130 and they are evenly distributed on the periphery of the rotation axis L, and there is one second magnetic part 140 . It is defined that when the knob 120 is at the initial position, the second magnetic member 140 is opposite to and attracted to one of the four first magnetic members 130 to fix the knob 120 at the initial position. When the knob 120 is rotated relative to the positioning member 110 by an external force, every time the knob 120 rotates 90°, the second magnetic member 140 can be opposed to and attracted to one of the four first magnetic members 130 to locate the rotation angle of the knob 120, namely The cooperation of four first magnetic parts 130 and one second magnetic part 140 can make the knob 120 realize the selection function of four rotation gears.

同样地,当第一磁性件130具有8个并均匀分布于转动轴线L的外围,第二磁性件140设有1个时,旋钮120每选择45°即可使得第二磁性件140与8个第一磁性件130中的一个的相对并相吸,从而可以在旋钮120每转动一定角度时可以对旋钮120进行定位。Similarly, when there are 8 first magnetic pieces 130 and they are evenly distributed on the periphery of the rotation axis L, and when there is 1 second magnetic piece 140, every time the knob 120 selects 45°, the second magnetic piece 140 can be connected with the 8 pieces. One of the first magnetic parts 130 is opposed and attracted to each other, so that the knob 120 can be positioned when the knob 120 rotates at a certain angle.

此外,第二磁性件140可以设有多个,多个第二磁性件140可以均匀分布于转动轴线L的外围,在旋钮120转动过程中,多个第二磁性件140可以分别与部分第一磁性件130正对并相互吸引,由此可以将旋钮120定位在特定的角度。其中,多个第二磁性件140分别与部分第一磁性件130相对并相吸,可以使得旋钮120在上述特点的角度时能够与定位件110配合紧密,不会出现散落现象。并且,设置多个第二磁性件140,在转动旋钮120的过程中,可以提供更强的吸力,转动触感更好。In addition, a plurality of second magnetic parts 140 can be provided, and the plurality of second magnetic parts 140 can be uniformly distributed on the periphery of the rotation axis L. During the rotation of the knob 120, the plurality of second magnetic parts 140 can be connected to some of the first magnetic parts respectively. The magnetic pieces 130 face and attract each other, so that the knob 120 can be positioned at a specific angle. Wherein, the plurality of second magnetic parts 140 are respectively opposed to and attracted to part of the first magnetic parts 130 , so that the knob 120 can be closely matched with the positioning part 110 at the above-mentioned characteristic angles without falling off. Moreover, a plurality of second magnetic members 140 are provided, which can provide stronger suction force during the process of turning the knob 120 , and provide a better tactile feeling when turning.

其中,第一磁性件130和第二磁性件140中的一者可以为磁铁、另一者可以为磁铁或者采用能够被磁铁吸附的铁磁性材料制成。Wherein, one of the first magnetic member 130 and the second magnetic member 140 may be a magnet, and the other may be a magnet or made of a ferromagnetic material capable of being attracted by a magnet.

请参阅图4,图4是本申请一些实施例中第一磁性件130和第二磁性件140的分布示意图。以第一磁性件130设有8个、第二磁性件140设有4个为例,8个第一磁性件130和4个第二磁性件140均环绕于转动轴线L的外围且均匀分布,相邻两个第一磁性件130与转动轴线L之间的夹角为45°,相邻两个第二磁性件140与转动轴线L之间的夹角为90°。当然,当第一磁性件130和第二磁性件140的数量发生改变时,相邻两个第一磁性件130与转动轴线L之间的夹角、以及相邻两个第二磁性件140与转动轴线L之间的夹角发生相应改变,不作赘述。Please refer to FIG. 4 . FIG. 4 is a schematic distribution diagram of the first magnetic member 130 and the second magnetic member 140 in some embodiments of the present application. Taking eight first magnetic parts 130 and four second magnetic parts 140 as an example, the eight first magnetic parts 130 and the four second magnetic parts 140 are evenly distributed around the periphery of the rotation axis L, The included angle between two adjacent first magnetic pieces 130 and the rotation axis L is 45°, and the included angle between two adjacent second magnetic pieces 140 and the rotation axis L is 90°. Certainly, when the numbers of the first magnetic pieces 130 and the second magnetic pieces 140 change, the included angle between two adjacent first magnetic pieces 130 and the rotation axis L, and the angle between two adjacent second magnetic pieces 140 and The included angle between the rotation axes L changes correspondingly, which will not be described in detail.

如图4所示,4个第二磁性件140分别标记为140a、140b、140c、140d;8个第一磁性件130分别标记为130a~130h。定义旋钮120在初始位置时,第二磁性件140与第一磁性件130的对应关系为:140a与130a、140b与130c、140c与130e、140d与130g相对并相吸。在旋钮120相对于定位件110沿顺时针S方向转动45°时,第二磁性件140与第一磁性件130的对应关系为:140a与130h、140b与130b、140c与130d、140d与130f相对并相吸。依次下去,在旋钮120相对于定位件110沿顺时针每转动45°时,4个第二磁性件140分别与8个第一磁性件130中的部分第一磁性件130相对并相吸,以定位旋钮120的转动角度。As shown in FIG. 4 , the four second magnetic components 140 are respectively marked as 140a, 140b, 140c, and 140d; the eight first magnetic components 130 are respectively marked as 130a-130h. When the knob 120 is at the initial position, the corresponding relationship between the second magnetic part 140 and the first magnetic part 130 is as follows: 140a and 130a, 140b and 130c, 140c and 130e, 140d and 130g are opposite and attract each other. When the knob 120 rotates 45° in the clockwise S direction relative to the positioning member 110, the corresponding relationship between the second magnetic member 140 and the first magnetic member 130 is: 140a is opposite to 130h, 140b is opposite to 130b, 140c is opposite to 130d, 140d is opposite to 130f and attract each other. Going down in sequence, when the knob 120 rotates 45° clockwise relative to the positioning member 110, the four second magnetic pieces 140 are respectively opposed to and attracted to some of the first magnetic pieces 130 in the eight first magnetic pieces 130, so that The rotation angle of the positioning knob 120.

可选地,第一磁性件130与转动轴线L之间具有第一间距L1,第二磁性件140与转动轴线L之间具有第二间距L2,L1与L2基本一致。Optionally, there is a first distance L1 between the first magnetic member 130 and the rotation axis L, and a second distance L2 between the second magnetic member 140 and the rotation axis L, and L1 and L2 are substantially the same.

再次参阅图2和图3,旋钮120的一端形成有触点121,该触点121可以随着旋钮120相对于定位件110转动,即触点121相对于定位件110的转动角度可以用于表征旋钮120相对于定位件110的转动角度。Referring to Fig. 2 and Fig. 3 again, one end of the knob 120 is formed with a contact point 121, and the contact point 121 can rotate with the knob 120 relative to the positioning member 110, that is, the rotation angle of the contact point 121 relative to the positioning member 110 can be used to characterize The rotation angle of the knob 120 relative to the positioning member 110 .

在触控组件100装配于电子设备800上时,触点121与触控屏810相接触以用于实现触控操作。换言之,通过对旋钮120施加外力使得触点121在触控屏810上形成相应的运动轨迹,从而实现触控操作,以此来为电子设备800提供实体的触觉反馈体验。且上述为电子设备800提供实体触觉反馈的触控组件100为无源控件,无需电池和电路设计即可实现实体触觉反馈体验,且整体结构简单,制造成本较低。此外,基于上述触控组件100的低成本、无源以及且易制作的特性,使得在进行设计验证时可以进行低成本的模型制作,且能提供更加真实的操作触感。When the touch component 100 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the contacts 121 are in contact with the touch screen 810 for realizing touch operation. In other words, by applying an external force to the knob 120 , the contact point 121 forms a corresponding movement track on the touch screen 810 , thereby realizing a touch operation, thereby providing a physical tactile feedback experience for the electronic device 800 . Moreover, the above-mentioned touch component 100 that provides physical tactile feedback for the electronic device 800 is a passive control, which can realize physical tactile feedback experience without battery and circuit design, and has a simple overall structure and low manufacturing cost. In addition, based on the low-cost, passive and easy-to-manufacture characteristics of the above-mentioned touch component 100 , low-cost model production can be performed during design verification, and a more realistic operating touch can be provided.

其中,定位件110具有相对设置的第一表面110a和第二表面110b,旋钮120设于第一表面110a上。具体而言,在触控组件100装配于电子设备800上时,第二表面110b为定位件110靠近触控屏810的表面,第一表面110a为定位件110背离触控屏810的表面。Wherein, the positioning member 110 has a first surface 110 a and a second surface 110 b oppositely disposed, and the knob 120 is disposed on the first surface 110 a. Specifically, when the touch component 100 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the second surface 110 b is the surface of the positioning member 110 close to the touch screen 810 , and the first surface 110 a is the surface of the positioning member 110 facing away from the touch screen 810 .

换言之,旋钮120设于定位件110的第一表面110a上,第二表面110b位于第一表面110a背离旋钮120的一侧。In other words, the knob 120 is disposed on the first surface 110 a of the positioning member 110 , and the second surface 110 b is located on a side of the first surface 110 a away from the knob 120 .

进一步地,旋钮120上设有凸起部122,即该凸起部122设于旋钮120靠近定位件110的一侧,并延伸至定位件110的第二表面110b的一侧。其中,触点121形成有凸起部122的端面上以用于与触控屏810相接触以用于实现触控操作。换言之,凸起部122自旋钮120靠近定位件110的表面延伸至定位件110靠近触控屏810的一侧。Further, the knob 120 is provided with a protruding portion 122 , that is, the protruding portion 122 is disposed on a side of the knob 120 close to the positioning member 110 and extends to a side of the second surface 110 b of the positioning member 110 . Wherein, the contact 121 is formed on an end surface of the protruding portion 122 for contacting with the touch screen 810 for realizing a touch operation. In other words, the protruding portion 122 extends from the surface of the knob 120 close to the positioning member 110 to a side of the positioning member 110 close to the touch screen 810 .

旋钮120具有相对设置的吸附面120a和旋钮面120b,吸附面120a邻近于第一表面110a设置,旋钮面120b位于吸附面120a背离第一表面110a的一侧。换言之,旋钮面120a被配置为用于接受外力作用以带动旋钮120相对于定位件110转动,吸附面120a被配置为用于与第一表面110a之间形成吸附连接结构,避免旋钮120与定位件110之间分离散落。The knob 120 has a suction surface 120a and a knob surface 120b oppositely disposed, the suction surface 120a is disposed adjacent to the first surface 110a, and the knob surface 120b is located on a side of the suction surface 120a away from the first surface 110a. In other words, the knob surface 120a is configured to receive an external force to drive the knob 120 to rotate relative to the positioning member 110, and the adsorption surface 120a is configured to form an adsorption connection structure with the first surface 110a, preventing the knob 120 from being connected to the positioning member. 110 are scattered among the separation.

其中,凸起部122自吸附面120a延伸至定位件110的第二表面110b的一侧,触点121形成有凸起部122背离吸附面120a的端面上。Wherein, the protruding portion 122 extends from the adsorption surface 120 a to one side of the second surface 110 b of the positioning member 110 , and the contact 121 is formed on an end surface of the protruding portion 122 away from the adsorption surface 120 a.

如前述,旋钮120与定位件110通过第一磁性件130和第二磁性件140实现吸附连接,避免二者之间分离散落。基于此,第一磁性件130和第二磁性件140中的一者可以设于第一表面110a上、另一者设于吸附面120a上。如图2所示,第一磁性件130设于第一表面110a上,第二磁性件140设于吸附面120a上,但不限于此。As mentioned above, the knob 120 and the positioning member 110 are connected by adsorption through the first magnetic member 130 and the second magnetic member 140 to avoid separation and scattering between the two. Based on this, one of the first magnetic element 130 and the second magnetic element 140 may be disposed on the first surface 110a, and the other may be disposed on the adsorption surface 120a. As shown in FIG. 2 , the first magnetic element 130 is disposed on the first surface 110a, and the second magnetic element 140 is disposed on the adsorption surface 120a, but not limited thereto.

请参阅图5和图6,图5是本申请一些实施例中触控组件100的结构拆分示意图,图6是图5实施例中触控组件100的另一视角的结构拆分示意图。其中,旋钮120上的凸起部122穿设于定位件110。Please refer to FIG. 5 and FIG. 6 . FIG. 5 is a schematic exploded view of the touch assembly 100 in some embodiments of the present application, and FIG. 6 is a schematic exploded view of the touch assembly 100 in another view of the embodiment in FIG. 5 . Wherein, the protruding portion 122 on the knob 120 passes through the positioning member 110 .

具体而言,定位件110具有贯穿第一表面110a和第二表面110b的轨道111,凸起部122可沿轨道111相对于定位件110转动。即凸起部122穿设于轨道111,并可沿轨道111移动,以相对于定位件110转动。Specifically, the positioning member 110 has a track 111 passing through the first surface 110 a and the second surface 110 b, and the protrusion 122 can rotate relative to the positioning member 110 along the track 111 . That is, the protruding portion 122 passes through the track 111 and can move along the track 111 to rotate relative to the positioning member 110 .

其中,轨道111可将定位件110划分为间隔设置的吸附部112和定位部113,定位部113环绕于吸附部112的外围以用于将定位件110定位于触控屏810上,吸附部112用于定位旋钮120。Wherein, the track 111 can divide the positioning part 110 into an adsorption part 112 and a positioning part 113 arranged at intervals, and the positioning part 113 surrounds the periphery of the adsorption part 112 for positioning the positioning part 110 on the touch screen 810. Used to locate the knob 120.

可选地,吸附部112和定位部113之间设有连接部114,该连接部114位于轨道111的起始端和终止端之间。通过连接部114连接吸附部112和定位部113,以形成一体结构的定位件110。Optionally, a connection part 114 is provided between the adsorption part 112 and the positioning part 113 , and the connection part 114 is located between the start end and the end end of the track 111 . The suction part 112 and the positioning part 113 are connected by the connecting part 114 to form a positioning part 110 with an integrated structure.

在一实施例中,旋钮120和定位件110中的一者上设有轴部115、另一者上形成有轴孔116,轴部115插设于轴孔116中以使得旋钮120能够相对于定位件110转动。即旋钮120和定位件110通过轴部115与轴孔116配合以实现转动连接。进一步地,轴部115形成于第一表面110a和吸附面120a中的一者上、轴孔116形成于第一表面110a和吸附面120a中的另一者上。如图5和图6所示,轴部115设于定位件110上,且位于吸附部112上,吸附部112上设有若干个环绕于轴部115外围并用于装配第一磁性件130或者第二磁性件140的槽孔。轴孔116设于旋钮120上并与轴部115对应设置,旋钮120上设有多个环绕于轴孔116外围并用于装配第一磁性件130或者第二磁性件140的槽孔。当然,可以理解的,当轴部115设于旋钮120、轴孔116设于定位件110上时,上述结构对应关系可以发生适应性调整,本申请实施例不再进行赘述。In one embodiment, one of the knob 120 and the positioning member 110 is provided with a shaft portion 115, and the other is formed with a shaft hole 116, and the shaft portion 115 is inserted into the shaft hole 116 so that the knob 120 can be positioned relatively The positioning member 110 rotates. That is, the knob 120 and the positioning member 110 cooperate with the shaft hole 116 through the shaft portion 115 to achieve rotational connection. Further, the shaft portion 115 is formed on one of the first surface 110a and the adsorption surface 120a, and the shaft hole 116 is formed on the other of the first surface 110a and the adsorption surface 120a. As shown in Fig. 5 and Fig. 6, the shaft part 115 is set on the positioning part 110, and is located on the adsorption part 112, and the adsorption part 112 is provided with a plurality of magnetic parts which surround the periphery of the shaft part 115 and are used to assemble the first magnetic part 130 or the second magnetic part 130. The slot holes of the two magnetic parts 140 . The shaft hole 116 is disposed on the knob 120 and corresponds to the shaft portion 115 . The knob 120 is provided with a plurality of slots surrounding the shaft hole 116 for assembling the first magnetic member 130 or the second magnetic member 140 . Of course, it can be understood that when the shaft portion 115 is disposed on the knob 120 and the shaft hole 116 is disposed on the positioning member 110 , the above-mentioned structural correspondence can be adaptively adjusted, which will not be repeated in this embodiment of the present application.

当然,在其他实施例中,吸附部112和旋钮120中的一者上形成有凸起、另一者上形成有环形槽(图中未示出),凸起插设于环形槽中以使得旋钮120能够相对于定位件110转动,即旋钮120和定位件110通过凸起和环形槽实现转动连接。其中,环形槽可以环绕于转动轴线L设置。另外,在一些实施例中,旋钮120可以嵌设于定位件110的第一表面110a上,并在第一表面110a上可以饶转动轴线L转动。Of course, in other embodiments, a protrusion is formed on one of the adsorption portion 112 and the knob 120, and an annular groove (not shown in the figure) is formed on the other, and the protrusion is inserted into the annular groove so that The knob 120 can rotate relative to the positioning member 110 , that is, the rotary connection between the knob 120 and the positioning member 110 is realized through the protrusion and the annular groove. Wherein, the annular groove can be arranged around the rotation axis L. In addition, in some embodiments, the knob 120 can be embedded on the first surface 110 a of the positioning member 110 , and can rotate about the rotation axis L on the first surface 110 a.

请参阅图7,图7是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件100的截面结构示意图,定义定位件110的第一表面110a所在平面为投影面,凸起部122投影于投影面上的投影位于定位件110投影于投影面上的投影的外围。即凸起部122位于定位件110的外围并可绕定位件110转动。此时,定位件110可以嵌设于旋钮120的吸附面120a并可相对于旋钮120转动。当然,旋钮120和定位件110还可以通过其他连接方式实现转动连接。Please refer to FIG. 7. FIG. 7 is a schematic cross-sectional structure diagram of the touch component 100 in another embodiment of the present application, defining the plane where the first surface 110a of the positioning member 110 is located as the projection plane, and the projection of the projection 122 on the projection plane. It is located at the periphery of the projection of the positioning member 110 on the projection plane. That is, the protruding portion 122 is located on the periphery of the positioning member 110 and can rotate around the positioning member 110 . At this time, the positioning member 110 can be embedded in the adsorption surface 120 a of the knob 120 and can rotate relative to the knob 120 . Of course, the rotary connection between the knob 120 and the positioning member 110 can also be achieved through other connection methods.

如前述,电子设备800的触控屏810可以为电容式触控屏和电阻式触控屏。当触控屏810为电阻式触控屏时,旋钮120可以在外力作用下使得触点121作用于触控屏810以实现旋转触控操作。As mentioned above, the touch screen 810 of the electronic device 800 can be a capacitive touch screen or a resistive touch screen. When the touch screen 810 is a resistive touch screen, the knob 120 can make the contact point 121 act on the touch screen 810 under the action of an external force to realize the rotary touch operation.

当触控屏810为电容式触控屏时,旋钮120可以采用导电材料制成,当手指或者导电物体触碰旋钮120的任意位置时,即可等效于手指或者导电物体触碰触控屏810,从而实现相应的触控操作。其中,为了避免出现误触碰,定位件110可以采用非导电材料制成。When the touch screen 810 is a capacitive touch screen, the knob 120 can be made of conductive material. When a finger or a conductive object touches any position of the knob 120, it is equivalent to a finger or a conductive object touching the touch screen. 810, so as to realize the corresponding touch operation. Wherein, in order to avoid false touch, the positioning member 110 can be made of non-conductive material.

需要说明的是,本申请实施例中的术语“第一”、“第二”、“第三”仅用于描述目的,而不能理解为指示或暗示相对重要性或者隐含指明所指示的技术特征的数量。由此,限定有“第一”、“第二”、“第三”的特征可以明示或者隐含地包括至少一个该特征。It should be noted that the terms "first", "second", and "third" in the embodiments of the present application are only used for descriptive purposes, and should not be understood as indicating or implying relative importance or implicitly indicating the indicated technology number of features. Thus, features defined as "first", "second", and "third" may explicitly or implicitly include at least one of these features.

触控组件300Touch component 300

请参阅图8至图11,图8是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件300在初始状态的结构示意图,图9是图8实施例中触控组件300在按压状态的结构示意图,图10是图8实施例中触控组件300与电子设备800配合的结构示意图,图11是图8实施例中触控组件300的结构拆分示意图。触控组件300可用于具有触控屏810的电子设备800上,以使得该电子设备800可以提供具有触觉使用体验的操作和输入。其中,电子设备800可为手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、可穿戴设备等装置,本申请实施例中电子设备800可以手机为例进行示例性的说明。Please refer to FIG. 8 to FIG. 11. FIG. 8 is a schematic structural view of the touch component 300 in an initial state in another embodiment of the present application. FIG. 9 is a schematic structural view of the touch component 300 in a pressed state in the embodiment of FIG. 8. FIG. 10 It is a schematic diagram of the structure of the touch assembly 300 cooperating with the electronic device 800 in the embodiment of FIG. 8 , and FIG. 11 is a schematic disassembly diagram of the structure of the touch assembly 300 in the embodiment of FIG. 8 . The touch component 300 can be used on an electronic device 800 with a touch screen 810, so that the electronic device 800 can provide operation and input with tactile experience. Wherein, the electronic device 800 may be a device such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, or a wearable device. In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 800 may be illustrated by taking a mobile phone as an example.

触控组件300可以包括定位组件310、按键组件320以及复位组件330。定位组件310用于将触控组件300装配于电子设备800上,按键组件320设于定位组件310上并能够相对于定位组件310移动,以使得按键组件320在初始状态和按压状态之间进行切换。其中,按键组件320在按压状态时可以作用于触控屏810以实现实体按键功能。The touch component 300 may include a positioning component 310 , a button component 320 and a reset component 330 . The positioning component 310 is used to assemble the touch component 300 on the electronic device 800, the key component 320 is arranged on the positioning component 310 and can move relative to the positioning component 310, so that the key component 320 is switched between the initial state and the pressed state . Wherein, the button component 320 can act on the touch screen 810 to realize the physical button function in the pressed state.

其中,定位组件310可拆卸地装配于电子设备800上,进而实现触控组件300与电子设备800的可拆卸装配。在触控组件300装配于电子设备800上时,按键组件320可以相对于定位组件310移动以作用于触控屏810以实现实体按键的触控操作,即实现实体按键的触觉体验。Wherein, the positioning component 310 is detachably assembled on the electronic device 800 , so as to realize the detachable assembly of the touch component 300 and the electronic device 800 . When the touch component 300 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the key component 320 can move relative to the positioning component 310 to act on the touch screen 810 to realize the touch operation of the physical key, that is, realize the tactile experience of the physical key.

复位组件330设于定位组件310和按键组件320之间,一方面可以在按键组件320未受力时对按键组件320进行定位,另一方面可以在撤销施加于按键组件320上的作用力时复位组件330可以驱动按键组件320复位。可以理解的,按键组件320在受到外力作用时相对于定位组件310移动并朝向靠近触控屏810的方向移动以作用于触控屏810,进而实现相应的触控操作;在撤销上述外力作用时,按键组件320在复位组件330的作用下朝向远离触控屏810的方向移动以回归初始状态。The reset component 330 is arranged between the positioning component 310 and the key component 320, on the one hand, the key component 320 can be positioned when the key component 320 is not stressed, and on the other hand, it can be reset when the force applied to the key component 320 is cancelled. The component 330 can drive the button component 320 to reset. It can be understood that when the button assembly 320 is subjected to an external force, it moves relative to the positioning assembly 310 and moves towards the direction close to the touch screen 810 to act on the touch screen 810, thereby realizing a corresponding touch operation; , the button assembly 320 moves away from the touch screen 810 under the action of the reset assembly 330 to return to the initial state.

其中,按键组件320在初始状态时并未作用于触控屏810,按键组件320受力由初始状态改变为按压状态时作用于触控屏810。Wherein, the key assembly 320 does not act on the touch screen 810 in the initial state, and acts on the touch screen 810 when the force on the key assembly 320 changes from the initial state to the pressed state.

综上,按键组件320能够相对于定位组件310移动以在初始状态和按压状态之间进行切换,复位组件330能够将按键组件320定位于初始状态。其中,按键组件320在受到外力作用由初始状态转变为按压状态时,可作用于触控屏810以实现触控操作;在撤销上述外力作用时复位组件330可使得按键组件320由按压状态回归初始状态。In summary, the key assembly 320 can move relative to the positioning assembly 310 to switch between the initial state and the pressed state, and the reset assembly 330 can position the key assembly 320 in the initial state. Wherein, when the button assembly 320 is changed from the initial state to the pressed state by an external force, it can act on the touch screen 810 to realize the touch operation; when the above-mentioned external force is canceled, the reset assembly 330 can make the button assembly 320 return to the initial state from the pressed state state.

换言之,复位组件330可以在按键组件320未受力时将按键组件320定位于初始状态。在按键组件320受力由初始状态移动至按压状态时,复位组件330可以产生促使按键组件320回归至初始状态的回复力。In other words, the reset component 330 can position the key component 320 in the initial state when the key component 320 is not stressed. When the key component 320 is forced to move from the initial state to the pressed state, the reset component 330 can generate a restoring force to prompt the key component 320 to return to the initial state.

在一实施例中,定位组件310可以包括第一定位件311,该第一定位件311具有容置槽311a以及连通容置槽311a的通孔311b。容置槽311a形成于第一定位件311的一侧,并在触控组件300装配于电子设备800上时,容置槽311a的槽口朝向触控屏810。In one embodiment, the positioning assembly 310 may include a first positioning member 311 having a receiving groove 311 a and a through hole 311 b communicating with the receiving groove 311 a. The accommodating groove 311 a is formed on one side of the first positioning member 311 , and when the touch assembly 300 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the notch of the accommodating groove 311 a faces the touch screen 810 .

按键组件320具有至少部分设于容置槽311a内的活动件321,该活动件321被配置为用于接受外力以使得活动件321相对于定位组件310移动,以作用于触控屏810。换言之,活动件321被配置为可以在外力作用下移动以作用于触控屏810。如图8至图10所示,在触控组件300装配于电子设备800上时,活动件321可以在外力作用下相对于第一定位件311移动直至活动件321与触控屏810直接接触,即按键组件320由初始状态切换至按压状态。在撤销上述外力时,活动件321在复位组件330的作用下与触控屏810分离,即按键组件320回归初始状态。The button assembly 320 has a movable part 321 at least partially disposed in the receiving groove 311 a, and the movable part 321 is configured to receive an external force so that the movable part 321 moves relative to the positioning assembly 310 to act on the touch screen 810 . In other words, the movable part 321 is configured to move under the action of an external force to act on the touch screen 810 . As shown in FIGS. 8 to 10 , when the touch assembly 300 is assembled on the electronic device 800, the movable part 321 can move relative to the first positioning part 311 under the action of an external force until the movable part 321 is in direct contact with the touch screen 810, That is, the button assembly 320 is switched from the initial state to the pressed state. When the above-mentioned external force is removed, the movable part 321 is separated from the touch screen 810 under the action of the reset component 330 , that is, the button component 320 returns to the initial state.

例如,当活动件321全部设于容置槽311a内时,可以通过穿设于通孔311b的其他结构对活动件321施加作用力,以使得活动件321能够相对于定位组件310移动直至作用于触控屏810。For example, when the movable part 321 is completely disposed in the accommodating groove 311a, a force can be applied to the movable part 321 through other structures pierced through the through hole 311b, so that the movable part 321 can move relative to the positioning assembly 310 until acting on touch screen 810 .

又如,当活动件321部分设于容置槽311a内时,另一部分可以穿设于通孔311b以用于接受外力作用,进而使得活动件321能够相对于定位组件310移动直至作用于触控屏810。As another example, when part of the movable part 321 is disposed in the accommodating groove 311a, the other part can be passed through the through hole 311b for receiving external force, so that the movable part 321 can move relative to the positioning component 310 until acting on the touch Screen 810.

在一实施例中,通孔311b贯穿于容置槽311a的底壁以连通容置槽311a,通孔311b与容置槽311a的槽口相对设置。活动件321具有主体部321a以及设于主体部321a的周侧上的限位部321b。主体部321a至少部分设于容置槽311a内并用于接受外力,限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁相配合以用于限位主体部321a的移动行程。具体而言,活动件321在复位组件330的作用下回归初始状态时,当限位部321b抵触于容置槽311a底壁时即可认为活动件321和按键组件320回归了初始状态。In one embodiment, the through hole 311b penetrates through the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a to communicate with the accommodating groove 311a, and the through hole 311b is disposed opposite to the notch of the accommodating groove 311a. The movable member 321 has a main body portion 321 a and a limiting portion 321 b disposed on a peripheral side of the main body portion 321 a. The main body portion 321a is at least partially disposed in the receiving groove 311a for receiving external force, and the limiting portion 321b cooperates with the bottom wall of the receiving groove 311a to limit the movement stroke of the main body portion 321a. Specifically, when the movable part 321 returns to the initial state under the action of the reset assembly 330 , when the limiting part 321b is in contact with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a, the movable part 321 and the button assembly 320 can be considered to have returned to the initial state.

其中,当主体部321a全部设于容置槽311a内时,主体部321a与通孔311b相对设置,穿设于通孔311b的其他结构可以对主体部321a施加作用力。当主体部321a部分设于容置槽311a内时,主体部321a的另一部分可以穿设于通孔311b以用于接受外力作用。Wherein, when the main body portion 321a is completely disposed in the receiving groove 311a, the main body portion 321a is disposed opposite to the through hole 311b, and other structures penetrated through the through hole 311b can exert force on the main body portion 321a. When the main body part 321a is partly disposed in the receiving groove 311a, another part of the main body part 321a may pass through the through hole 311b for receiving external force.

在一实施例中,按键组件320还可以包括按压件322,该按压件322可以具有按压部322a和抵接部322b。其中,抵接部322b被配置为用于与主体部321a相抵触,按压部322a设于抵接部322b背离主体部321a的一侧,并被配置为用于接受外力。当对按压部322a施加按压力时可以使得按压件322与活动件321同步移动,直至活动件321作用于触控屏810。当撤销施加于按压部322a上的按压力时,在复位组件330的作用下,活动件321和按压件322同步移动并与触控屏810分离。In an embodiment, the button assembly 320 may further include a pressing member 322, and the pressing member 322 may have a pressing portion 322a and an abutting portion 322b. Wherein, the abutting portion 322b is configured to be in contact with the main body portion 321a, and the pressing portion 322a is disposed on a side of the abutting portion 322b away from the main body portion 321a, and is configured to receive an external force. When a pressing force is applied to the pressing part 322 a, the pressing part 322 and the movable part 321 may move synchronously until the movable part 321 acts on the touch screen 810 . When the pressing force applied to the pressing portion 322 a is canceled, the movable part 321 and the pressing part 322 move synchronously and separate from the touch screen 810 under the action of the reset assembly 330 .

其中,当主体部321a全部设于容置槽311a内时,抵接部322b穿设于通孔311b并与主体部321a相抵触。当主体部321a部分设于容置槽311a内时,主体部321a的另一部分可以穿设于通孔311b,抵接部322b与主体部321a穿设于通孔311b的一端相抵触。Wherein, when the main body portion 321a is completely disposed in the accommodating groove 311a, the abutting portion 322b passes through the through hole 311b and abuts against the main body portion 321a. When part of the main body 321a is disposed in the accommodating groove 311a, another part of the main body 321a may pass through the through hole 311b, and the abutting portion 322b conflicts with one end of the main body 321a passed through the through hole 311b.

进一步地,抵接部322b可以为形成于按压部322a上的凸起或者凹陷,与之对应地,主体部321a的端部形成有与抵接部322b相适配的结构,以便于抵接部322b与主体部321a的抵接。例如,抵接部322b可以为形成于按压部322a上的凸起结构,主体部321a的端部形成有与抵接部322b相适配的凹陷结构。又如,抵接部322b可以为形成于按压部322a上的凹陷结构,主体部321a的端部形成有与抵接部322b相适配的凸起结构。其中,凸起结构可以嵌设于凹陷结构中以完成上述抵接。Further, the abutting portion 322b may be a protrusion or a depression formed on the pressing portion 322a, and correspondingly, the end of the main body portion 321a is formed with a structure matching the abutting portion 322b, so that the abutting portion 322b abuts against the main body portion 321a. For example, the abutting portion 322b may be a protruding structure formed on the pressing portion 322a, and an end portion of the main body portion 321a is formed with a concave structure matching the abutting portion 322b. As another example, the abutting portion 322b may be a concave structure formed on the pressing portion 322a, and the end of the main body portion 321a is formed with a protruding structure matching the abutting portion 322b. Wherein, the protruding structure can be embedded in the concave structure to complete the abutment.

其中,按键组件320在初始状态时,限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁相抵触,按压部322a与容置槽311a的底壁之间具有第一间距J1。Wherein, when the button assembly 320 is in an initial state, the limiting portion 321b is in contact with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a, and there is a first distance J1 between the pressing portion 322a and the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a.

按键组件320在按压状态时,限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁之间具有第二间距J2。其中,第二间距J2不超过第一间距J1。When the button assembly 320 is in the pressed state, there is a second distance J2 between the limiting portion 321b and the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a. Wherein, the second distance J2 does not exceed the first distance J1.

可选地,当第二间距J2小于第一间距J1时,在按压状态时,按压部322a与容置槽311a的底壁之间的间隙可以为J1-J2。当第二间距J2等于第一间距J1时,在按压状态时,按压部322a抵触于容置槽311a的底壁;在初始状态时,限位部321b抵触于容置槽311a的底壁。Optionally, when the second distance J2 is smaller than the first distance J1, in the pressed state, the gap between the pressing portion 322a and the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a may be J1-J2. When the second distance J2 is equal to the first distance J1, in the pressed state, the pressing portion 322a collides with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a; in the initial state, the limiting portion 321b collides with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a.

在一实施例中,复位组件330可以包括第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332。第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332中的一者可以设于按键组件320上、另一者设于定位组件310上。其中,第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332之间形成有可促使按键组件320回归初始状态的第一磁力。可以理解的,该第一磁力可以为前述的回复力。In an embodiment, the reset assembly 330 may include a first magnetic component 331 and a second magnetic component 332 . One of the first magnetic component 331 and the second magnetic component 332 may be disposed on the button assembly 320 , and the other may be disposed on the positioning assembly 310 . Wherein, a first magnetic force is formed between the first magnetic member 331 and the second magnetic member 332 to make the button assembly 320 return to the original state. It can be understood that the first magnetic force may be the aforementioned restoring force.

例如,第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332中的一者可以为磁铁、另一者可以为磁铁或者采用能够被磁铁吸附的铁磁性材料制成。第一磁力为第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332之间的磁性吸附力。如图2所示,第一磁性件331设于容置槽331a的底壁上,第二磁性件332设于限位部321b上。按键组件320在初始状态时,第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332相吸,且限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁相抵触;按键组件320受到外力作用并克服第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332之间的磁性吸附力使得按键组件320切换至按压状态时,限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁之间具有第二间距;当撤销按键组件320受到的外力时,在第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332之间的磁性吸附力的作用下,使得限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁相抵触,即按键组件320切换至初始状态。For example, one of the first magnetic member 331 and the second magnetic member 332 may be a magnet, and the other may be a magnet or made of a ferromagnetic material capable of being attracted by a magnet. The first magnetic force is the magnetic attraction force between the first magnetic member 331 and the second magnetic member 332 . As shown in FIG. 2 , the first magnetic element 331 is disposed on the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 331 a, and the second magnetic element 332 is disposed on the limiting portion 321 b. When the button assembly 320 is in the initial state, the first magnetic member 331 and the second magnetic member 332 attract each other, and the stopper 321b is in contact with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a; the button assembly 320 is subjected to an external force and overcomes the first magnetic member 331 and the second magnetic member 332 make the button assembly 320 switch to the pressed state, there is a second distance between the limiting part 321b and the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a; when the external force received by the button assembly 320 is canceled At this time, under the action of the magnetic adsorption force between the first magnetic member 331 and the second magnetic member 332, the limiting portion 321b is in contact with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a, that is, the button assembly 320 is switched to the initial state.

当然,在其他实施方式中,第一磁力可以为第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332之间的磁性相斥力。例如,第一磁性件331设于容置槽331a的底壁上,第二磁性件332设于按压部322a上。此时,第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332之间的磁性相斥力可以使得按键组件320定位于初始状态。按键组件320可以在外力作用克服第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332之间的磁性相斥力以使得按键组件320切换至按压状态。Certainly, in other implementation manners, the first magnetic force may be a magnetic repulsion force between the first magnetic member 331 and the second magnetic member 332 . For example, the first magnetic element 331 is disposed on the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 331a, and the second magnetic element 332 is disposed on the pressing portion 322a. At this time, the magnetic repulsion force between the first magnetic part 331 and the second magnetic part 332 can make the button assembly 320 be positioned in the initial state. The button assembly 320 can overcome the magnetic repulsion force between the first magnetic member 331 and the second magnetic member 332 under the action of an external force, so that the button assembly 320 is switched to the pressed state.

请参阅图12,图12是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件300在初始状态的结构示意图,复位组件330可以具有第一弹性件333,该第一弹性件333分别连接于按键组件320和定位组件310。其中,在按压状态时,第一弹性件333发生形变产生第一弹力,该第一弹力可使按键组件320回归初始状态。可以理解的,该第一弹力可以为前述的回复力。Please refer to FIG. 12. FIG. 12 is a schematic structural diagram of the touch assembly 300 in an initial state in other embodiments of the present application. The reset assembly 330 may have a first elastic member 333, and the first elastic member 333 is respectively connected to the button assembly 320 and the button assembly 320. Positioning assembly 310 . Wherein, in the pressed state, the first elastic member 333 is deformed to generate a first elastic force, and the first elastic force can make the button assembly 320 return to the original state. It can be understood that the first elastic force may be the aforementioned restoring force.

其中,第一弹性件333可以为弹簧、橡胶、硅胶或者泡棉等。Wherein, the first elastic member 333 may be a spring, rubber, silica gel or foam.

例如,第一弹性件333的一端连接于容置槽331a的底壁、另一端连接于按压部322a。第一弹性件333可对按压件322进行支撑以使得按键组件320可以定位于初始形态。按键组件320受到外力作用并克服第一弹性件333的支撑力使得按键组件320切换至按压状态时,第一弹性件333发生形变产生第一弹力。当撤销按键组件320受到的外力时,在第一弹力的作用下,按键组件320可以切换至初始状态。当然,在其他实施例中,第一弹性件333也可以套设于活动件321的主体部321a上,第一弹性件333的相对两端可以分别抵触于按压件322和定位组件310。For example, one end of the first elastic member 333 is connected to the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 331a, and the other end is connected to the pressing portion 322a. The first elastic member 333 can support the pressing member 322 so that the button assembly 320 can be positioned in an initial shape. When the button assembly 320 is subjected to an external force and overcomes the supporting force of the first elastic member 333 so that the button assembly 320 is switched to the pressed state, the first elastic member 333 is deformed to generate a first elastic force. When the external force on the key assembly 320 is removed, the key assembly 320 can be switched to the initial state under the action of the first elastic force. Of course, in other embodiments, the first elastic member 333 can also be sleeved on the main body portion 321 a of the movable member 321 , and the opposite ends of the first elastic member 333 can respectively resist the pressing member 322 and the positioning assembly 310 .

又如,第一弹性件333可以设于容置槽311a内,其一端连接于容置槽331a的底壁、另一端连接于限位部321b。第一弹性件333可对活动件321进行支撑以使得按键组件320可以定位于初始形态。按键组件320受到外力作用并克服第一弹性件333的支撑力使得按键组件320切换至按压状态时,第一弹性件333发生形变产生第一弹力。当撤销按键组件320受到的外力时,在第一弹力的作用下,按键组件320可以切换至初始状态。当然,在其他实施例中,第一弹性件333也可以套设于活动件321的主体部321a上,第一弹性件333的相对两端可以分别抵触于容置槽331a的底壁和活动件321的限位部321b。As another example, the first elastic member 333 can be disposed in the receiving groove 311a, one end of which is connected to the bottom wall of the receiving groove 331a, and the other end is connected to the limiting portion 321b. The first elastic member 333 can support the movable member 321 so that the button assembly 320 can be positioned in an initial shape. When the button assembly 320 is subjected to an external force and overcomes the supporting force of the first elastic member 333 so that the button assembly 320 is switched to the pressed state, the first elastic member 333 is deformed to generate a first elastic force. When the external force on the key assembly 320 is removed, the key assembly 320 can be switched to the initial state under the action of the first elastic force. Of course, in other embodiments, the first elastic member 333 can also be sleeved on the main body portion 321a of the movable member 321, and the opposite ends of the first elastic member 333 can be in contact with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 331a and the movable member respectively. 321 of the limiting portion 321b.

如图10所示,当触控组件300装配于电子设备800上时,活动件321可以在外力作用下相对于容置槽331a移动,直至活动件321与触控屏810相接触以作用于触控屏810实现按压触控操作。复位组件330可以在活动件321未受力时将活动件321定位于初始状态。在活动件321受力由初始状态移动至按压状态时,活动件321与触控屏810相接触,此时复位组件330可以产生促使活动件321回归初始状态的回复力。As shown in FIG. 10, when the touch component 300 is assembled on the electronic device 800, the movable part 321 can move relative to the accommodating groove 331a under the action of an external force until the movable part 321 contacts the touch screen 810 to act on the touch screen 810. The control screen 810 realizes press touch operation. The reset assembly 330 can position the movable part 321 in an initial state when the movable part 321 is not stressed. When the movable part 321 is forced to move from the initial state to the pressed state, the movable part 321 is in contact with the touch screen 810 , and at this time the reset component 330 can generate a restoring force for urging the movable part 321 to return to the initial state.

按键组件320在初始状态时,活动件321与触控屏810间隔设置,即活动件321没有作用于触控屏810。按键组件320在按压状态时,活动件321与触控屏810相接触,即活动件321直接作用于触控屏810。When the button assembly 320 is in an initial state, the movable part 321 is spaced apart from the touch screen 810 , that is, the movable part 321 does not act on the touch screen 810 . When the button assembly 320 is in the pressed state, the movable part 321 is in contact with the touch screen 810 , that is, the movable part 321 directly acts on the touch screen 810 .

如前述,电子设备800的触控屏810可以为电容式触控屏和电阻式触控屏。当触控屏810为电阻式触控屏时,按键组件320可以在外力作用下使得活动件321抵触于触控屏810以实现按压触控操作。As mentioned above, the touch screen 810 of the electronic device 800 can be a capacitive touch screen or a resistive touch screen. When the touch screen 810 is a resistive touch screen, the button assembly 320 can make the movable part 321 contact the touch screen 810 under the action of external force to realize the press touch operation.

当触控屏810为电容式触控屏时,按键组件320可以采用导电材料制成,当手指或者导电物体触碰按键组件320的任意位置时,即可等效于手指或者导电物体触碰触控屏810,从而实现相应的按压触控操作。其中,为了避免出现误触碰,定位组件310可以采用非导电材料制成。When the touch screen 810 is a capacitive touch screen, the button assembly 320 can be made of conductive material. When a finger or a conductive object touches any position of the button assembly 320, it can be equivalent to the touch of a finger or a conductive object. Control screen 810, so as to realize the corresponding press touch operation. Wherein, in order to avoid false touches, the positioning component 310 can be made of non-conductive materials.

请参阅图13至图16,图13是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件300的结构拆分示意图,图14是图13实施例中触控组件300另一视角的结构拆分示意图,图15是图13实施例中触控组件300在初始状态的结构示意图,图16是图13实施例中触控组件300在按压状态的结构示意图。其中,本实施例触控组件300与前述实施例中触控组件300的区别在于:定位组件310可以包括第一定位件311和第二定位件312。Please refer to FIG. 13 to FIG. 16 , FIG. 13 is a schematic disassembly diagram of the touch assembly 300 in other embodiments of the present application, and FIG. 14 is a schematic disassembly diagram of the structure of the touch assembly 300 from another perspective in the embodiment of FIG. 13 . 15 is a schematic structural diagram of the touch component 300 in the initial state in the embodiment of FIG. 13 , and FIG. 16 is a schematic structural diagram of the touch component 300 in the pressed state in the embodiment of FIG. 13 . The difference between the touch component 300 in this embodiment and the touch component 300 in the previous embodiments is that the positioning component 310 may include a first positioning component 311 and a second positioning component 312 .

其中,容置槽311a形成于第一定位件311的一侧,第二定位件312盖设于容置槽311a的槽口。第一定位件311可以参考前述实施例中的具体描述,故此不再进行赘述。第二定位件312和第一定位件311相配合以用于限制活动件321的移动行程。Wherein, the accommodating groove 311 a is formed on one side of the first positioning member 311 , and the second positioning member 312 covers the notch of the accommodating groove 311 a. For the first positioning member 311 , reference may be made to the specific descriptions in the foregoing embodiments, so details are not repeated here. The second positioning member 312 cooperates with the first positioning member 311 to limit the moving stroke of the movable member 321 .

具体而言,按键组件320在初始状态时,活动件321的限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁相抵触,活动件321与第二定位件312间隔设置。Specifically, when the button assembly 320 is in an initial state, the limiting portion 321b of the movable part 321 is in contact with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a, and the movable part 321 is spaced apart from the second positioning part 312 .

按键组件320在按压状态时,活动件321的限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁间隔设置,活动件321抵触于第二定位件312。由此,通过设于第一定位件311上的容置槽311a以及盖设于容置槽311a槽口的第二定位件312,可以对活动件321的移动行程进行限制。When the button assembly 320 is in the pressed state, the limiting portion 321 b of the movable member 321 is spaced apart from the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311 a , and the movable member 321 is in contact with the second positioning member 312 . Thus, the movement stroke of the movable member 321 can be limited by the receiving groove 311a provided on the first positioning member 311 and the second positioning member 312 covering the notch of the receiving groove 311a.

在一实施例中,复位组件330可具有第二弹性件(图中未示出),该第二弹性件333分别连接于按键组件320和第二定位件312。其中,在按压状态时,第二弹性件发生形变产生第二弹力,该第二弹力可使按键组件320回归初始状态。可以理解的,该第二弹力可为前述的回复力。In one embodiment, the reset assembly 330 may have a second elastic member (not shown in the figure), and the second elastic member 333 is respectively connected to the button assembly 320 and the second positioning member 312 . Wherein, in the pressed state, the second elastic member is deformed to generate a second elastic force, and the second elastic force can make the button assembly 320 return to the original state. It can be understood that the second elastic force may be the aforementioned restoring force.

其中,第二弹性件可以为弹簧、橡胶、硅胶或者泡棉等。Wherein, the second elastic member may be a spring, rubber, silica gel or foam.

例如,第二弹性件可设于容置槽311a内,其一端连接或者抵接于活动件321、另一端连接或者抵接于第二定位件312。第二弹性件可对活动件321进行支撑以使得按键组件320可定位于初始形态。按键组件320受到外力作用并克服第二弹性件的支撑力使得按键组件320切换至按压状态时,第二弹性件发生形变产生第二弹力。当撤销按键组件320受到的外力时,在第二弹力的作用下,按键组件320可以切换至初始状态。当然,在其他实施例中,第二弹性件也可套设于活动件321的主体部321a上,且第二弹性件的一端可以抵触于第二定位件312。For example, the second elastic member can be disposed in the receiving groove 311 a, one end of which is connected or abutted against the movable member 321 , and the other end is connected or abutted against the second positioning member 312 . The second elastic member can support the movable member 321 so that the button assembly 320 can be positioned in an initial shape. When the button assembly 320 is subjected to an external force and overcomes the supporting force of the second elastic member so that the button assembly 320 is switched to the pressed state, the second elastic member deforms to generate a second elastic force. When the external force on the key assembly 320 is removed, the key assembly 320 can switch to the initial state under the action of the second elastic force. Certainly, in other embodiments, the second elastic member may also be sleeved on the main body portion 321 a of the movable member 321 , and one end of the second elastic member may be in contact with the second positioning member 312 .

在一实施例中,复位组件330可以包括第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336。第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336中的一者可以设于按键组件320上、另一者可以设于第二定位件312上。其中,第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336之间形成有可促使按键组件320回归初始状态的第二磁力。可以理解的,该第二磁力可以为前述的回复力。In an embodiment, the reset assembly 330 may include a third magnetic component 335 and a fourth magnetic component 336 . One of the third magnetic component 335 and the fourth magnetic component 336 can be disposed on the button assembly 320 , and the other can be disposed on the second positioning component 312 . Wherein, a second magnetic force is formed between the third magnetic member 335 and the fourth magnetic member 336 to make the button assembly 320 return to the original state. It can be understood that the second magnetic force may be the aforementioned restoring force.

其中,第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336均可为磁铁,且第二磁力为第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336之间的磁性排斥力。例如,第三磁性件335设于活动件321靠近第二定位件312的一端,第四磁性件336设于第二定位件312靠近活动件321的一侧。第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336之间的磁性排斥力可以使得按键组件320定位于初始状态,即此时活动件321与第二定位件312间隔设置。按键组件320可以在外力作用克服第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336之间的磁性相斥力以使得按键组件320切换至按压状态,此时,活动件321抵触于第二定位件312。Wherein, both the third magnetic member 335 and the fourth magnetic member 336 can be magnets, and the second magnetic force is a magnetic repulsion force between the third magnetic member 335 and the fourth magnetic member 336 . For example, the third magnetic element 335 is disposed at an end of the movable element 321 close to the second positioning element 312 , and the fourth magnetic element 336 is disposed at a side of the second positioning element 312 close to the movable element 321 . The magnetic repulsive force between the third magnetic part 335 and the fourth magnetic part 336 can make the button assembly 320 be positioned in the initial state, that is, the movable part 321 is spaced apart from the second positioning part 312 at this time. The button assembly 320 can overcome the magnetic repulsion force between the third magnetic member 335 and the fourth magnetic member 336 under the action of an external force, so that the button assembly 320 is switched to the pressed state. At this time, the movable member 321 is in contact with the second positioning member 312 .

可选地,第三磁性件335可通过嵌入、卡扣、粘接等方式设于活动件321靠近第二定位件312的一端,第四磁性件336可通过嵌入、卡扣、粘接等方式设于第二定位件312靠近活动件321的一侧。优选地,第三磁性件335嵌设于活动件321的一端,且第三磁性件335不突出于活动件321的端面设置;第四磁性件336嵌设于第二定位件312,且第四磁性件336不突出于第二定位件312的表面设置。Optionally, the third magnetic part 335 can be installed on the end of the movable part 321 close to the second positioning part 312 by embedding, snapping, bonding, etc. It is disposed on a side of the second positioning member 312 close to the movable member 321 . Preferably, the third magnetic part 335 is embedded in one end of the movable part 321, and the third magnetic part 335 is not protruding from the end surface of the movable part 321; the fourth magnetic part 336 is embedded in the second positioning part 312, and the fourth The magnetic component 336 is not protruding from the surface of the second positioning component 312 .

进一步地,在触控组件300装配于电子设备800上时,第二定位件312用于与触控屏810相接触。在按压状态时,活动件321可以抵触于第二定位件312,即活动件321可以通过第二定位件312作用于触控屏810以实现按压触控操作。Further, when the touch component 300 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the second positioning member 312 is used to contact the touch screen 810 . In the pressed state, the movable part 321 can interfere with the second positioning part 312 , that is, the movable part 321 can act on the touch screen 810 through the second positioning part 312 to realize the press touch operation.

如前述,当触控屏810为电阻式触控屏时,活动件321可以在外力作用下抵触于第二定位件312,进而使得第二定位件312作用于触控屏810以实现按压触控操作。其中,第二定位件312可在活动件321的作用下发生一定形变以使得触控屏810能够响应触控操作。当然,在其他实施方式中,当触控屏810为电阻式触控屏时,活动件321上设有能够穿设于第二定位件312的凸起;在按压状态时,凸起抵触于触控屏810。As mentioned above, when the touch screen 810 is a resistive touch screen, the movable part 321 can interfere with the second positioning part 312 under the action of an external force, so that the second positioning part 312 acts on the touch screen 810 to realize pressing touch operate. Wherein, the second positioning member 312 can be deformed under the action of the movable member 321 so that the touch screen 810 can respond to the touch operation. Of course, in other embodiments, when the touch screen 810 is a resistive touch screen, the movable part 321 is provided with a protrusion that can pass through the second positioning part 312; Control screen 810.

当触控屏810为电容式触控屏时,按键组件320和第二定位件312可以采用导电材料制成。在按压状态时,活动件321抵触于第二定位件312,手指或者导电物体触碰按键组件320的任意位置,即可等效于手指或者导电物体触碰触控屏810,从而实现相应的按压触控操作。其中,为了避免出现误触碰,第一定位件311可以采用非导电材料制成。When the touch screen 810 is a capacitive touch screen, the button assembly 320 and the second positioning member 312 can be made of conductive materials. In the pressed state, the movable part 321 is in contact with the second positioning part 312, and a finger or a conductive object touches any position of the key assembly 320, which is equivalent to a finger or a conductive object touching the touch screen 810, thereby realizing corresponding pressing Touch operation. Wherein, in order to avoid false touch, the first positioning member 311 can be made of non-conductive material.

如前述,活动件321在容置槽311a内可沿靠近或者远离第二定位件312的方向移动,且第二定位件312与第一定位件311配合限制活动件321的移动行程。其中,活动件321的主体部321a的周侧上设置有至少一个限位部321b,该限位部321b一方面可以用于限位活动件321的移动行程,另一方面还可以避免活动件321在移动过程中发生自转。As mentioned above, the movable part 321 can move in the receiving groove 311 a along a direction approaching or away from the second positioning part 312 , and the second positioning part 312 cooperates with the first positioning part 311 to limit the moving stroke of the movable part 321 . Wherein, at least one limiting portion 321b is provided on the peripheral side of the main body portion 321a of the movable member 321, and the limiting portion 321b can be used to limit the moving stroke of the movable member 321 on the one hand, and can also prevent the moving member 321 from moving. Rotation occurs during movement.

具体而言,第一定位件311或者第二定位件312上设有多个限位柱312a,该多个限位柱312a环绕于活动件321的外围设置,并在活动件321的周侧上依次间隔设置。相邻两个限位柱312a之间形成用于引导限位部321b移动的限位槽312b,以避免活动件321在移动时发生自转。Specifically, the first positioning member 311 or the second positioning member 312 is provided with a plurality of limiting columns 312a, the plurality of limiting columns 312a are arranged around the periphery of the movable member 321, and on the peripheral side of the movable member 321 Set intervals in sequence. A limiting slot 312b for guiding the movement of the limiting portion 321b is formed between two adjacent limiting posts 312a, so as to prevent the movable member 321 from rotating when moving.

即限位柱312a设于第一定位件311和第二定位件312之间,并设于容置槽311a内。限位槽312b可以引导活动件321在沿靠近或者远离第二定位件312的方向上移动,以避免活动件321的移动出现偏移现象。而限位柱312a可以限制活动件321在移动时出现自转现象。That is, the limiting column 312a is disposed between the first positioning member 311 and the second positioning member 312, and is disposed in the accommodating groove 311a. The limit slot 312b can guide the movable part 321 to move in a direction approaching or away from the second positioning part 312, so as to avoid the phenomenon of deviation in the movement of the movable part 321. The limit column 312a can limit the self-rotation phenomenon of the movable part 321 when moving.

可以理解的是:本申请实施例中所有方向性指示(诸如上、下、左、右、前、后……)仅用于解释在某一特定姿态(如附图所示)下各部件之间的相对位置关系、运动情况等,如果该特定姿态发生改变时,则该方向性指示也相应地随之改变。It can be understood that all directional indications (such as up, down, left, right, front, back...) in the embodiments of the present application are only used to explain If the specific posture changes, the directional indication will also change accordingly.

触控组件500Touch component 500

请参阅图17至图19,图17是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件500的结构拆分示意图,图18是图17实施例中触控组件500的截面结构示意图,图19是图18实施例中触控组件500与电子设备800配合时的结构示意图。触控组件500可以用于具有触控屏810的电子设备800上,以使得该电子设备800可以提供具有触觉使用体验的操作和输入。其中,电子设备800可以为手机、平板电脑、笔记本电脑、可穿戴设备等装置,本申请实施例中电子设备800可以手机为例进行示例性的说明。Please refer to FIG. 17 to FIG. 19. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram of the disassembly of the touch component 500 in other embodiments of the present application. FIG. 18 is a schematic cross-sectional structure diagram of the touch component 500 in the embodiment of FIG. 17. FIG. A schematic diagram of the structure of the touch component 500 in cooperation with the electronic device 800 in the embodiment. The touch component 500 can be used on an electronic device 800 with a touch screen 810, so that the electronic device 800 can provide operation and input with tactile experience. Wherein, the electronic device 800 may be a device such as a mobile phone, a tablet computer, a notebook computer, or a wearable device. In the embodiment of the present application, the electronic device 800 may be illustrated by taking a mobile phone as an example.

触控组件500可以包括固定件510、摇杆组件520以及归位组件530。固定件510用于将触控组件500装配于电子设备800上,摇杆组件520设于固定件510上,并被配置为用于作用于电子设备800的触控屏810以实现触控操作。摇杆组件520能够相对于固定件510移动以使得摇杆组件520能够作用于触控屏810的初始位置和目标位置。The touch component 500 may include a fixing member 510 , a rocker component 520 and a reset component 530 . The fixing part 510 is used to assemble the touch component 500 on the electronic device 800 , and the rocker component 520 is disposed on the fixing part 510 and is configured to act on the touch screen 810 of the electronic device 800 to realize touch operation. The rocker assembly 520 can move relative to the fixing member 510 so that the rocker assembly 520 can act on the initial position and the target position of the touch screen 810 .

其中,固定件510可拆卸地装配于电子设备800上,进而实现触控组件500与电子设备800的可拆卸装配。在触控组件500装配于电子设备800上时,摇杆组件520可以相对于固定件510移动并作用于触控屏810以实现实体摇杆控件的触控操作,即可以实现实体摇杆的触觉体验。Wherein, the fixing member 510 is detachably assembled on the electronic device 800 , so as to realize the detachable assembly of the touch component 500 and the electronic device 800 . When the touch assembly 500 is assembled on the electronic device 800, the joystick assembly 520 can move relative to the fixed part 510 and act on the touch screen 810 to realize the touch operation of the physical joystick control, that is, the tactile sensation of the physical joystick can be realized. experience.

进一步地,在触控组件500装配于电子设备800上时,定义摇杆组件520与触控屏810相接触的位置为触控屏810的初始位置;此后在摇杆组件520受到外力作用时,摇杆组件520相对于固定件510移动,并与触控屏810的其他位置相接触,此时相接触的其他位置可以定位为触控屏810的目标位置。其中,目标位置可以具有若干个,即摇杆组件520受到外力作用时可以与触控屏810的不同目标位置相接触。可选地,若干个目标位置覆盖的区域可以环绕于初始位置的外围。Further, when the touch assembly 500 is assembled on the electronic device 800, the position where the rocker assembly 520 is in contact with the touch screen 810 is defined as the initial position of the touch screen 810; thereafter, when the rocker assembly 520 is subjected to an external force, The rocker assembly 520 moves relative to the fixing member 510 and is in contact with other positions of the touch screen 810 . At this time, the other positions in contact can be positioned as target positions of the touch screen 810 . There may be several target positions, that is, the rocker assembly 520 may be in contact with different target positions of the touch screen 810 when subjected to an external force. Optionally, the area covered by several target positions may surround the periphery of the initial position.

优选地,若干个目标位置覆盖的区域可以为以初始位置为圆心、摇杆组件520的移动行程为半径的圆形区域。其中,摇杆组件520受到外力作用时可以与触控屏810的不同目标位置相接触,距离初始位置最远的目标位置可以定义出摇杆组件520受到外力作用时的移动行程。Preferably, the area covered by the several target positions may be a circular area with the initial position as the center and the moving stroke of the rocker assembly 520 as the radius. Wherein, the rocker assembly 520 can be in contact with different target positions of the touch screen 810 when subjected to an external force, and the target position farthest from the initial position can define a moving stroke of the rocker assembly 520 when the external force is applied.

归位组件530可以设于固定件510和/或者摇杆组件520上,并被配置为用于提供摇杆组件520自目标位置向初始位置移动的作用力。进一步地,归位组件530一方面可以在摇杆组件520未受力时将摇杆组件520对应于初始位置进行定位,另一方面可以在撤销施加于摇杆组件520上的作用力时可以驱动摇杆组件520自目标位置向初始位置移动以归位。The reset assembly 530 may be disposed on the fixing member 510 and/or the rocker assembly 520, and is configured to provide an active force for the rocker assembly 520 to move from the target position to the initial position. Further, on the one hand, the reset component 530 can position the rocker assembly 520 corresponding to the initial position when the rocker assembly 520 is not stressed, and on the other hand, can drive when the force applied to the rocker assembly 520 is cancelled. The rocker assembly 520 moves from the target position to the initial position for homing.

可以理解的,基于摇杆组件520能够接触于触控屏810的初始位置和目标位置,即可以将触控屏810的初始位置和目标位置理解为摇杆组件520的初始位置和目标位置。摇杆组件520在初始位置受到外力作用时相对于固定件510移动并可移动至目标位置,在撤销上述外力作用时,摇杆组件520在归位组件530的作用下自目标位置向初始位置移动。其中,归位组件530还可将摇杆组件520定位于摇杆组件520的初始位置。It can be understood that based on the rocker assembly 520 being able to touch the initial position and the target position of the touch screen 810 , that is, the initial position and the target position of the touch screen 810 can be understood as the initial position and the target position of the rocker assembly 520 . The rocker assembly 520 moves relative to the fixing member 510 and can move to the target position when the initial position is subjected to an external force, and when the above-mentioned external force is canceled, the rocker assembly 520 moves from the target position to the initial position under the action of the return assembly 530 . Wherein, the reset assembly 530 can also position the rocker assembly 520 at the initial position of the rocker assembly 520 .

在一实施例中,固定件510具有收容槽511以及连通收容槽511的孔512。收容槽511形成于固定件510的一侧,并在触控组件500装配于电子设备800上时,收容槽511的槽口朝向触控屏810。In one embodiment, the fixing member 510 has a receiving groove 511 and a hole 512 communicating with the receiving groove 511 . The receiving groove 511 is formed on one side of the fixing member 510 , and when the touch component 500 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the notch of the receiving groove 511 faces the touch screen 810 .

摇杆组件520具有设于收容槽511内的第一部分521以及穿设于孔512的第二部分522。第二部分522突出于固定件510的表面设置,并在接受外力作用时可以带动第一部分521在收容槽511内移动,以使得第一部分521能够接触于触控屏810的初始位置和目标位置。The rocker assembly 520 has a first portion 521 disposed in the receiving groove 511 and a second portion 522 passed through the hole 512 . The second part 522 protrudes from the surface of the fixing part 510 and can drive the first part 521 to move in the receiving groove 511 when receiving an external force, so that the first part 521 can contact the initial position and the target position of the touch screen 810 .

具体而言,固定件510可以具有相对设置的顶面510a以及底面510b、以及设于顶面510a和底面510b之间的侧面510c。其中,顶面510a、底面510b以及侧面510c配合限定出固定件510的外轮廓形状。Specifically, the fixing member 510 may have a top surface 510a and a bottom surface 510b disposed opposite to each other, and a side surface 510c disposed between the top surface 510a and the bottom surface 510b. Wherein, the top surface 510 a , the bottom surface 510 b and the side surface 510 c cooperate to define the outer contour shape of the fixing member 510 .

进一步地,在触控组件500装配于电子设备800上时,底面510b位于触控屏810上,顶面510a位于底面510b背离触控屏810的一侧。Further, when the touch component 500 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the bottom surface 510 b is located on the touch screen 810 , and the top surface 510 a is located on a side of the bottom surface 510 b away from the touch screen 810 .

其中,收容槽511形成于底面510b上,且收容槽511的槽口朝向背离顶面510a的一侧。可选地,第一部分521用于接触触控屏810的表面与底面510b共面设置,或者,第一部分521用于接触触控屏810的表面位于底面510b背离顶面510a的一侧。可以理解的,第一部分521背离顶面510a的表面被配置为用于与触控屏810相接触。Wherein, the receiving groove 511 is formed on the bottom surface 510b, and the notch of the receiving groove 511 faces a side away from the top surface 510a. Optionally, the surface of the first portion 521 for contacting the touch screen 810 is coplanar with the bottom surface 510b, or, the surface of the first portion 521 for contacting the touch screen 810 is located on the side of the bottom surface 510b away from the top surface 510a. It can be understood that the surface of the first portion 521 away from the top surface 510 a is configured to be in contact with the touch screen 810 .

如图18和图19所示,在触控组件500装配于电子设备800上时,设于收容槽511内的第一部分521与触控屏810接触。第一部分521在第二部分522的带动下在初始位置和目标位置之间移动,即第一部分521的移动方向大体上平行于触控屏810的触控面。其中,第一部分521可以抵触于收容槽511的底壁,以避免第一部分521发生晃动。As shown in FIGS. 18 and 19 , when the touch component 500 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the first portion 521 disposed in the receiving groove 511 is in contact with the touch screen 810 . The first part 521 is driven by the second part 522 to move between the initial position and the target position, that is, the moving direction of the first part 521 is substantially parallel to the touch surface of the touch screen 810 . Wherein, the first part 521 can be in contact with the bottom wall of the receiving groove 511 to prevent the first part 521 from shaking.

进一步地,在第一部分521接触于触控屏810的初始位置时,第一部分521与收容槽511的侧壁之间呈间距设置,以为第一部分521提供移动空间。与此同时,第二部分522与孔512的内壁之间呈间距设置,以为第二部分522提供移动空间。Furthermore, when the first part 521 is in contact with the initial position of the touch screen 810 , there is a distance between the first part 521 and the sidewall of the receiving groove 511 to provide a moving space for the first part 521 . At the same time, there is a distance between the second part 522 and the inner wall of the hole 512 to provide a moving space for the second part 522 .

其中,第一部分521与收容槽511的侧壁之间的间距可以定义出第一部分521的移动行程。第二部分522与孔512的内壁之间的间距也可以定义出第一部分521的移动行程。基于此,当第一部分521与收容槽511的侧壁之间的间距和第二部分522与孔512的内壁之间的间距相同时,二者均可定义出第一部分521的移动行程。当第一部分521与收容槽511的侧壁之间的间距大于第二部分522与孔512的内壁之间的间距时,第二部分522与孔512的内壁之间的间距定义出第一部分521的移动行程。当第一部分521与收容槽511的侧壁之间的间距小于第二部分522与孔512的内壁之间的间距时,第一部分521与收容槽511的侧壁之间的间距定义出第一部分521的移动行程。Wherein, the distance between the first part 521 and the sidewall of the receiving groove 511 can define the movement stroke of the first part 521 . The distance between the second part 522 and the inner wall of the hole 512 can also define the movement stroke of the first part 521 . Based on this, when the distance between the first part 521 and the side wall of the receiving groove 511 and the distance between the second part 522 and the inner wall of the hole 512 are the same, both can define the movement stroke of the first part 521 . When the distance between the first part 521 and the side wall of the receiving groove 511 is larger than the distance between the second part 522 and the inner wall of the hole 512, the distance between the second part 522 and the inner wall of the hole 512 defines the first part 521. Mobile itinerary. When the distance between the first part 521 and the side wall of the receiving groove 511 is smaller than the distance between the second part 522 and the inner wall of the hole 512, the distance between the first part 521 and the side wall of the receiving groove 511 defines the first part 521 mobile itinerary.

在一实施例中,摇杆组件520还可以具有第三部分523,该第三部分523设于第二部分522背离第一部分521的一侧并连接于第二部分522。其中,该第三部分523可以与固定件510间隔设置,并被配置为用于接受外力,以带动第一部分521和第二部分522移动。可选地,第三部分523在孔512的径向上的宽度不小于孔512的径向宽度。In an embodiment, the rocker assembly 520 may further have a third portion 523 , which is disposed on a side of the second portion 522 away from the first portion 521 and connected to the second portion 522 . Wherein, the third part 523 can be spaced apart from the fixing part 510 and configured to receive an external force to drive the first part 521 and the second part 522 to move. Optionally, the width of the third portion 523 in the radial direction of the hole 512 is not smaller than the radial width of the hole 512 .

在一实施例中,孔512自收容槽511的底壁延伸至顶面510a,即孔512的一端连通至收容槽511的底壁、另一端连通至顶面510a。In one embodiment, the hole 512 extends from the bottom wall of the receiving tank 511 to the top surface 510a, that is, one end of the hole 512 communicates with the bottom wall of the receiving tank 511, and the other end communicates with the top surface 510a.

请参阅图20,图20是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件500的截面结构示意图,该实施例与前述实施例的区别在于:孔512自收容槽511的侧壁延伸至侧面510c,即孔512的一端连通至收容槽511的侧壁、另一端连通至侧面510c。Please refer to FIG. 20. FIG. 20 is a schematic cross-sectional structure diagram of a touch component 500 in another embodiment of the present application. The difference between this embodiment and the previous embodiment is that the hole 512 extends from the side wall of the receiving groove 511 to the side 510c, that is, One end of the hole 512 communicates with the sidewall of the receiving groove 511 , and the other end communicates with the side surface 510c.

综上,在触控组件500装配于电子设备800上时,摇杆组件520的移动方向可以平行于触控屏810的触控面,以使得第一部分521在与触控屏810保持接触的状态下可在初始位置和目标位置之间移动。In summary, when the touch assembly 500 is assembled on the electronic device 800, the moving direction of the joystick assembly 520 can be parallel to the touch surface of the touch screen 810, so that the first part 521 is in a state of keeping in contact with the touch screen 810 Down to move between the initial position and the target position.

再次参阅图17至图19,归位组件530可以包括第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532,第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532中的一者可以设于摇杆组件520上、另一者设于固定件510上。其中,第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532之间具有磁性力,该磁性力被配置为用于驱动摇杆组件520自目标位置向初始位置移动。可选地,磁性力可为磁性斥力。Referring again to FIGS. 17 to 19 , the homing assembly 530 may include a first magnetic piece 531 and a second magnetic piece 532 , and one of the first magnetic piece 531 and the second magnetic piece 532 may be disposed on the rocker assembly 520 , The other is disposed on the fixing member 510 . Wherein, there is a magnetic force between the first magnetic member 531 and the second magnetic member 532, and the magnetic force is configured to drive the rocker assembly 520 to move from the target position to the initial position. Alternatively, the magnetic force may be magnetic repulsion.

例如,第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532均可以为磁铁,磁性力为第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532之间的磁性斥力。该磁性磁力一方面可以将摇杆组件520定位于初始位置,另一方面可以提供摇杆组件520自目标位置向初始位置移动的驱动力。For example, both the first magnetic part 531 and the second magnetic part 532 can be magnets, and the magnetic force is the magnetic repulsion between the first magnetic part 531 and the second magnetic part 532 . On the one hand, the magnetic force can position the rocker assembly 520 at the initial position, and on the other hand, it can provide the driving force for the rocker assembly 520 to move from the target position to the initial position.

如图18所示,第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532中的一者可以设于第一部分521上、另一者可以设于收容槽511的侧壁上。当然,在其他实施例中,第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532中的一者可以设于第二部分522上、另一者可以设于孔512的内壁上。As shown in FIG. 18 , one of the first magnetic component 531 and the second magnetic component 532 may be disposed on the first portion 521 , and the other may be disposed on the side wall of the receiving groove 511 . Certainly, in other embodiments, one of the first magnetic member 531 and the second magnetic member 532 may be disposed on the second portion 522 , and the other may be disposed on the inner wall of the hole 512 .

请参阅图21,图21是图18实施例中第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532的分布示意图。其中,以第一磁性件531设于收容槽511的侧壁上、第二磁性件532设于第一部分521上为例。第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532可以分别设有多个,多个第一磁性件531和多个第二磁性件532分别一一相对设置。可选地,多个第一磁性件531环绕于第一部分521的外围设置。优选地,多个第一磁性件531在第一部分521的周向上依次均匀间隔设置。当然,在其他实施例中,当第一磁性件531设于孔512的内壁上时,多个第一磁性件531环绕于第二部分522的外围设置。优选地,多个第一磁性件531在第二部分522的周向上依次均匀间隔设置。Please refer to FIG. 21 . FIG. 21 is a schematic diagram of distribution of the first magnetic member 531 and the second magnetic member 532 in the embodiment of FIG. 18 . Wherein, it is taken that the first magnetic member 531 is disposed on the side wall of the receiving groove 511 and the second magnetic member 532 is disposed on the first portion 521 as an example. A plurality of first magnetic parts 531 and a plurality of second magnetic parts 532 can be respectively provided, and the plurality of first magnetic parts 531 and the plurality of second magnetic parts 532 are arranged opposite to each other. Optionally, a plurality of first magnetic elements 531 are disposed around the periphery of the first portion 521 . Preferably, a plurality of first magnetic members 531 are arranged at regular intervals in sequence in the circumferential direction of the first portion 521 . Of course, in other embodiments, when the first magnetic element 531 is disposed on the inner wall of the hole 512 , a plurality of first magnetic elements 531 are disposed around the periphery of the second portion 522 . Preferably, a plurality of first magnetic members 531 are arranged at regular intervals sequentially in the circumferential direction of the second portion 522 .

可以理解的,上述实施例仅示例性地列举出了第一磁性件531和第二磁性件532的分布方式,但不限于此。It can be understood that, the above embodiment only exemplifies the distribution manner of the first magnetic components 531 and the second magnetic components 532 , but is not limited thereto.

请参阅图22,图22是本申请另一些实施例中归位组件530的分布示意图。归位组件530可以包括弹性件533,该弹性件533可以设于收容槽511和/或者孔512内。其中,弹性件533的两端分别连接或者抵接于摇杆组件520和固定件510。在第一部分521与触控屏810的目标位置接触时,弹性件533发生形变产生弹力,该弹力被配置为用于驱动第一部分521自目标位置向初始位置移动。此外,弹性件533还可以将第一部分521定位于初始位置。Please refer to FIG. 22 . FIG. 22 is a schematic distribution diagram of a homing component 530 in another embodiment of the present application. The reset assembly 530 may include an elastic member 533 , and the elastic member 533 may be disposed in the receiving groove 511 and/or the hole 512 . Wherein, two ends of the elastic member 533 are respectively connected or abutted against the rocker assembly 520 and the fixing member 510 . When the first part 521 is in contact with the target position of the touch screen 810 , the elastic member 533 deforms to generate elastic force, and the elastic force is configured to drive the first part 521 to move from the target position to the initial position. In addition, the elastic member 533 can also position the first portion 521 at an initial position.

例如,如图22所示,弹性件533可设于收容槽511内。For example, as shown in FIG. 22 , the elastic member 533 can be disposed in the receiving groove 511 .

可选地,弹性件533的一端连接设于固定件510上,另一端连接或抵接于第一部分521。和/或者,弹性件533的一端连接设于第一部分521上,另一端连接或抵接于固定件510。Optionally, one end of the elastic member 533 is connected to the fixing member 510 , and the other end is connected to or abuts against the first portion 521 . And/or, one end of the elastic member 533 is connected to the first portion 521 , and the other end is connected or abutted against the fixing member 510 .

优选地,弹性件533的一端连接设于收容槽511的侧壁上,另一端连接或抵接于第一部分521。和/或者,弹性件533的一端连接设于第一部分521上,另一端连接或抵接于收容槽511的侧壁。Preferably, one end of the elastic member 533 is connected to the sidewall of the receiving groove 511 , and the other end is connected to or abuts against the first portion 521 . And/or, one end of the elastic member 533 is connected to the first portion 521 , and the other end is connected or abutted against the sidewall of the receiving groove 511 .

又如,弹性件533可以设于孔512内(图中未示出)。As another example, the elastic member 533 may be disposed in the hole 512 (not shown in the figure).

可选地,弹性件533的一端连接设于固定件510上,另一端连接或者抵接于第二部分522。和/或者,弹性件533的一端连接设于第二部分522上,另一端连接或者抵接于固定件510。Optionally, one end of the elastic member 533 is connected to the fixing member 510 , and the other end is connected to or abuts against the second portion 522 . And/or, one end of the elastic member 533 is connected to the second portion 522 , and the other end is connected to or abuts against the fixing member 510 .

优选地,弹性件533的一端连接设于孔512的内壁上,另一端连接或者抵接于第二部分522。和/或者,弹性件533的一端连接设于第二部分522上,另一端连接或者抵接于孔512的内壁。Preferably, one end of the elastic member 533 is connected to the inner wall of the hole 512 , and the other end is connected to or abuts against the second portion 522 . And/or, one end of the elastic member 533 is connected to the second portion 522 , and the other end is connected to or abuts against the inner wall of the hole 512 .

其中,弹性件533可以为弹簧、橡胶、硅胶或者泡棉等。Wherein, the elastic member 533 can be a spring, rubber, silica gel or foam etc.

在一实施例中,弹性件533可以设有多个,多个弹性件533在第一部分521和/或者第二部分522的周向上依次均匀间隔设置。In an embodiment, multiple elastic members 533 may be provided, and the plurality of elastic members 533 are sequentially and evenly spaced along the circumferential direction of the first part 521 and/or the second part 522 .

可以理解的,上述实施例仅示例性地列举出了弹性件533的连接方式以及分布方式,但不限于此。It can be understood that, the above embodiment only exemplarily lists the connection manner and distribution manner of the elastic member 533 , but is not limited thereto.

如图19所示,当触控组件500装配于电子设备800上时,摇杆组件520的第一部分521与触控屏810的初始位置相接触。摇杆组件520可以在外力作用下相对于收容槽511移动,使得第一部分521可以与触控屏810的目标位置相接触以实现滑动触控操作。归位组件530可以在摇杆组件520未受力时将第一部分521定位在与触控屏810的初始位置相接触的状态。在摇杆组件520受力相对于收容槽511移动,第一部分521可以与触控屏810的目标位置相接触,此时归位组件530可以产生驱动第一部分521自目标位置向初始位置移动的作用力。As shown in FIG. 19 , when the touch assembly 500 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the first portion 521 of the rocker assembly 520 is in contact with the initial position of the touch screen 810 . The rocker assembly 520 can move relative to the receiving groove 511 under the action of an external force, so that the first part 521 can contact the target position of the touch screen 810 to realize the sliding touch operation. The reset component 530 can position the first part 521 in a state of being in contact with the initial position of the touch screen 810 when the rocker component 520 is not stressed. When the rocker assembly 520 is forced to move relative to the receiving groove 511, the first part 521 can be in contact with the target position of the touch screen 810. At this time, the homing component 530 can drive the first part 521 to move from the target position to the initial position. force.

如前述,电子设备800的触控屏810可以为电容式触控屏和电阻式触控屏。当触控屏810为电阻式触控屏时,摇杆组件520可以在外力作用下使得第一部分521抵触于触控屏810以实现滑动触控操作。As mentioned above, the touch screen 810 of the electronic device 800 can be a capacitive touch screen or a resistive touch screen. When the touch screen 810 is a resistive touch screen, the rocker assembly 520 can make the first part 521 contact the touch screen 810 under the action of external force to realize the sliding touch operation.

当触控屏810为电容式触控屏时,摇杆组件320可以采用导电材料制成,当手指或者导电物体触碰摇杆组件320的任意位置时,即可等效于手指或者导电物体触碰触控屏810,从而实现相应的滑动触控操作。其中,为了避免出现误触碰,固定件510可以采用非导电材料制成。When the touch screen 810 is a capacitive touch screen, the rocker assembly 320 can be made of conductive material. When a finger or a conductive object touches any position of the rocker assembly 320, it can be equivalent to a finger or a conductive object touching any position of the rocker assembly 320. Touch the touch screen 810 to realize a corresponding sliding touch operation. Wherein, in order to avoid false touches, the fixing member 510 can be made of non-conductive materials.

需要说明的是,在本文术语中,“导电材料”可以是指用于输送和传导电流的材料,其一般分为常用金属导电材料、复合型高分子导电材料以及结构型高分子导电材料。常用金属导电材料主要包括金属元素、合金(例如铜合金、铝合金等)、以及复合金属材料。复合型高分子导电材料一般由通用的高分子材料与各种导电性物质通过填充复合、表面复合或层积复合等方式而制得,其主要包括导电塑料、导电橡胶、导电纤维织物、导电涂料、导电胶粘剂以及透明导电薄膜等。结构型高分子导电材料一般是指高分子结构本身或经过掺杂之后具有导电功能的高分子材料,其一般包括高分子半导体、高分子金属和高分子超导体。It should be noted that, in the terminology herein, "conductive material" may refer to materials used to transport and conduct current, which are generally divided into common metal conductive materials, composite polymer conductive materials and structural polymer conductive materials. Commonly used metal conductive materials mainly include metal elements, alloys (such as copper alloys, aluminum alloys, etc.), and composite metal materials. Composite polymer conductive materials are generally made of general-purpose polymer materials and various conductive substances through filling compounding, surface compounding or lamination compounding, which mainly include conductive plastics, conductive rubber, conductive fiber fabrics, and conductive coatings. , conductive adhesives and transparent conductive films, etc. Structural polymer conductive materials generally refer to polymer materials that have a conductive function after the polymer structure itself or after doping, and generally include polymer semiconductors, polymer metals and polymer superconductors.

例如,“导电材料”以导电橡胶或者导电硅胶为例,导电橡胶一般是将玻璃镀银、铝镀银、银等导电颗粒均匀分布在橡胶或者硅胶中,通过压力使导电颗粒接触,达到良好的导电效果。For example, "conductive material" takes conductive rubber or conductive silica gel as an example. Conductive rubber generally distributes conductive particles such as glass silver-plated, aluminum silver-plated, and silver evenly in rubber or silica gel, and the conductive particles are contacted by pressure to achieve good Conductive effect.

其中,本申请中的触控组件(100、300、500)均为无源控件,即无需供电结构及相关电路设计,可以简化触控组件的结构设计以及制成工艺。例如可以直接通过3D打印快速完成制作。换言之,本申请实施例提供的触控组件(100、300、500)结构简单、成本低廉,且无源易制作,可以通用于具有触控屏的电子设备。此外,上述触控组件(100、300、500)装配于电子设备上时能够提供更加真实的操作触控。Among them, the touch components (100, 300, 500) in this application are all passive controls, that is, no power supply structure and related circuit design are required, which can simplify the structural design and manufacturing process of the touch components. For example, the production can be quickly completed directly through 3D printing. In other words, the touch component (100, 300, 500) provided by the embodiment of the present application has a simple structure, low cost, passive and easy to manufacture, and can be commonly used in electronic devices with touch screens. In addition, when the above-mentioned touch control component (100, 300, 500) is assembled on an electronic device, it can provide a more realistic operation touch.

本申请提供的可以装配于具有触控屏的电子设备上的触控组件(100、300、500),基于触控组件的结构简单、制造成本低且可模块化设计等特点,在形态设计上可以做到灵活多样性。即用户可以自定义按键、旋钮、摇杆等结构尺寸以及结构布局等,以适配于不同的电子设备外观形态,且可以适配于电子设备的不同使用场景。The touch components (100, 300, 500) provided by this application can be assembled on electronic devices with touch screens. Based on the characteristics of the touch components, such as simple structure, low manufacturing cost and modular design, in terms of form design Can be flexible and diverse. That is, users can customize the structural dimensions and structural layouts of buttons, knobs, and joysticks, etc., so as to adapt to different appearances of electronic devices and to adapt to different usage scenarios of electronic devices.

基于此,下文将结合电子设备的不同使用场景来进一步说明上述触控组件(100、300、500)在提升用户使用体验上的优越性。Based on this, the following will further illustrate the superiority of the above-mentioned touch components (100, 300, 500) in improving user experience in combination with different usage scenarios of electronic devices.

其中,可以定义一种电子设备系统,该电子设备系统可以包括电子设备以及可拆卸地装配于电子设备上的触控组件,该触控组件可以作用于电子设备的触控屏,以实现诸如按压、转动、滑动等触控操作。可以理解的,触控组件可以为前述实施例中的至少一种触控组件。Among them, an electronic equipment system can be defined, and the electronic equipment system can include an electronic equipment and a touch assembly detachably assembled on the electronic equipment, and the touch assembly can act on the touch screen of the electronic equipment to realize such as pressing , rotate, slide and other touch operations. It can be understood that the touch component may be at least one touch component in the foregoing embodiments.

电子设备800Electronic equipment 800

请参阅图23,图23是本申请一些实施例中电子设备800的结构示意图,电子设备800可以具有触控屏810和壳体820。触控屏810设于壳体820的一侧,并与壳体820围设形成用于设置电路板、电池、传感器、摄像头等结构件的容置空间,以使得电子设备800能够实现相应的功能。其中,触控屏810、传感器、摄像头等结构件可以通过柔性电路板(FlexiblePrinted Circuit,FPC)分别与电路板、电池等电性连接,以使得他们能够得到电池的电能供应,并能够在电路板的控制下执行相应的指令以及与电路板实现交互。Please refer to FIG. 23 . FIG. 23 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device 800 in some embodiments of the present application. The electronic device 800 may have a touch screen 810 and a casing 820 . The touch screen 810 is arranged on one side of the casing 820, and is surrounded by the casing 820 to form an accommodating space for setting circuit boards, batteries, sensors, cameras and other structural components, so that the electronic device 800 can realize corresponding functions . Among them, the touch screen 810, sensor, camera and other structural components can be electrically connected to the circuit board, battery, etc. through a flexible circuit board (Flexible Printed Circuit, FPC), so that they can receive the power supply of the battery, and can be printed on the circuit board. Execute the corresponding instructions and interact with the circuit board under the control of the computer.

触控屏810可以用于为电子设备800提供图像显示功能。壳体820可用于安装电子设备800所需的各类电子器件,且壳体820可与触控屏810共同围设形成可用于安装电子设备800所需的电子器件的容置空间,如传感器、麦克风、扬声器、摄像头、闪光灯、电路板以及电池等电子器件,以实现如语音交流、音频播放、拍照以及照明等功能。The touch screen 810 can be used to provide an image display function for the electronic device 800 . The housing 820 can be used to install various electronic devices required by the electronic device 800, and the housing 820 and the touch screen 810 can jointly form an accommodating space for installing electronic devices required by the electronic device 800, such as sensors, Electronic devices such as microphones, speakers, cameras, flashlights, circuit boards, and batteries to achieve functions such as voice communication, audio playback, photography, and lighting.

电子设备900Electronic equipment 900

请参阅图24,图24是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备900的结构示意框图,该电子设备900可以包括:存储器901、处理器(Central Processing Unit,CPU)902、电路板(图中未示出)、电源电路和麦克风913。电路板安置在壳体围成的空间内部;CPU902和存储器901设置在电路板上;电源电路用于为电子设备的各个电路或器件供电;存储器901用于存储可执行程序代码;CPU902通过读取存储器901中存储的可执行程序代码来运行与可执行程序代码对应的计算机程序,以对上述识别信息进行识别实现解锁以及唤醒功能。Please refer to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 is a schematic block diagram of an electronic device 900 in another embodiment of the present application. The electronic device 900 may include: a memory 901, a processor (Central Processing Unit, CPU) 902, a circuit board (not shown in the figure) Shown), power supply circuit and microphone 913. The circuit board is placed inside the space enclosed by the housing; the CPU902 and the memory 901 are arranged on the circuit board; the power supply circuit is used to supply power to each circuit or device of the electronic equipment; the memory 901 is used to store executable program codes; the CPU902 reads The executable program code stored in the memory 901 runs a computer program corresponding to the executable program code, so as to identify the above identification information to realize unlocking and waking up functions.

电子设备还可包括:外设接口903、RF(Radio Frequency,射频)电路905、音频电路906、扬声器911、电源管理芯片908、输入/输出(I/O)子系统其他输入/控制设备、触控屏912、其他输入/控制设备910以及外部端口904,这些部件通过一个或多个通信总线或信号线907来通信。其中,触控屏912可以为前述实施例中的触控屏810。The electronic equipment may also include: peripheral interface 903, RF (Radio Frequency, radio frequency) circuit 905, audio circuit 906, speaker 911, power management chip 908, input/output (I/O) subsystem and other input/control devices, touch Control panel 912 , other input/control devices 910 , and external ports 904 communicate through one or more communication buses or signal lines 907 . Wherein, the touch screen 912 may be the touch screen 810 in the foregoing embodiments.

存储器901可以被CPU902、外设接口903等访问,存储器901可以包括高速随机存取存储器,还可以包括非易失性存储器,例如一个或多个磁盘存储器件、闪存器件、或其他易失性固态存储器件。外设接口903可以将设备的输入和输出外设连接到CPU902和存储器901。The memory 901 can be accessed by the CPU 902, the peripheral interface 903, etc. The memory 901 can include a high-speed random access memory, and can also include a non-volatile memory, such as one or more magnetic disk storage devices, flash memory devices, or other volatile solid state memory device. The peripherals interface 903 can connect the input and output peripherals of the device to the CPU 902 and the memory 901 .

I/O子系统909可以将设备上的输入输出外设,例如触控屏912和其他输入/控制设备910,连接到外设接口903。I/O子系统909可包括显示控制器9091和用于控制其他输入/控制设备910的一个或多个输入控制器9092。其中,一个或多个输入控制器9092从其他输入/控制设备910接收电信号或者向其他输入/控制设备910发送电信号,其他输入/控制设备910可以包括物理按钮(按压按钮、摇臂按钮等)、拨号盘、滑动开关、操纵杆、点击滚轮。值得说明的是,输入控制器9092可以与以下任一个连接:键盘、红外端口、USB接口以及诸如鼠标的指示设备。The I/O subsystem 909 can connect input and output peripherals on the device, such as a touch screen 912 and other input/control devices 910 , to the peripheral interface 903 . The I/O subsystem 909 may include a display controller 9091 and one or more input controllers 9092 for controlling other input/control devices 910 . Among them, one or more input controllers 9092 receive electrical signals from or send electrical signals to other input/control devices 910, which may include physical buttons (push buttons, rocker buttons, etc. ), dials, slide switches, joysticks, click wheels. It is worth noting that the input controller 9092 can be connected to any of the following: a keyboard, an infrared port, a USB interface, and a pointing device such as a mouse.

触控屏912是用户电子设备与用户之间的输入接口和输出接口,将可视输出显示给用户,可视输出可以包括图形、文本、图标、视频等。The touch screen 912 is an input interface and an output interface between the user electronic device and the user, and displays visual output to the user. The visual output may include graphics, text, icons, videos, and the like.

I/O子系统909中的显示控制器9091从触控屏912接收电信号或者向触控屏912发送电信号。触控屏912检测触控屏上的接触,显示控制器9091将检测到的接触转换为与显示在触控屏912上的用户界面对象的交互,即实现人机交互,显示在触控屏912上的用户界面对象可以是运行游戏的图标、联网到相应网络的图标等。The display controller 9091 in the I/O subsystem 909 receives electrical signals from the touch screen 912 or sends electrical signals to the touch screen 912 . The touch screen 912 detects the contact on the touch screen, and the display controller 9091 converts the detected contact into an interaction with a user interface object displayed on the touch screen 912, that is, realizes human-computer interaction, and displays it on the touch screen 912. The user interface objects on the may be icons for running games, icons for networking to corresponding networks, and the like.

RF电路905主要用于建立手机与无线网络(即网络侧)的通信,实现手机与无线网络的数据接收和发送。例如收发短信息、电子邮件等。具体地,RF电路905接收并发送RF信号,RF信号也称为电磁信号,RF电路905将电信号转换为电磁信号或将电磁信号转换为电信号,并且通过该电磁信号与通信网络以及其他设备进行通信。RF电路905可以包括用于执行这些功能的已知电路,其包括但不限于天线系统、RF收发机、一个或多个放大器、调谐器、一个或多个振荡器、数字信号处理器、CODEC(COder-DECoder,编译码器)芯片组、用户标识模块(Subscriber Identity Module,SIM)等等。The RF circuit 905 is mainly used to establish communication between the mobile phone and the wireless network (that is, the network side), and realize data reception and transmission between the mobile phone and the wireless network. Such as sending and receiving short messages, e-mails, etc. Specifically, the RF circuit 905 receives and sends RF signals, which are also called electromagnetic signals, and the RF circuit 905 converts electrical signals into electromagnetic signals or converts electromagnetic signals into electrical signals, and communicates with communication networks and other devices through the electromagnetic signals to communicate. RF circuitry 905 may include known circuitry for performing these functions including, but not limited to, an antenna system, an RF transceiver, one or more amplifiers, a tuner, one or more oscillators, a digital signal processor, a CODEC ( COder-DECoder, Codec) Chipset, Subscriber Identity Module (Subscriber Identity Module, SIM) and so on.

音频电路906,主要用于从外设接口903接收音频数据,将该音频数据转换为电信号,并且将该电信号发送给扬声器911。扬声器911,用于将手机通过RF电路905从无线网络接收的语音信号,还原为声音并向用户播放该声音。电源管理芯片908,用于为CPU902、I/O子系统及外设接口所连接的硬件进行供电及电源管理。The audio circuit 906 is mainly used to receive audio data from the peripheral interface 903 , convert the audio data into electrical signals, and send the electrical signals to the speaker 911 . The speaker 911 is used to restore the voice signal received by the mobile phone from the wireless network through the RF circuit 905 into sound and play the sound to the user. The power management chip 908 is used for power supply and power management for the hardware connected to the CPU 902 , the I/O subsystem and the peripheral interface.

可以理解的,在一些应用场景中,图23可以认为是电子设备的外形结构示意图,图24可以认为是电子设备的功能模块结构示意图。It can be understood that, in some application scenarios, FIG. 23 can be regarded as a schematic diagram of an external structure of an electronic device, and FIG. 24 can be regarded as a schematic diagram of a functional module structure of an electronic device.

电子设备系统20Electronic Equipment System 20

请参阅图25,图25是本申请一些实施例中电子设备系统20的结构示意图,电子设备系统20可以包括电子设备800和触控模组200,电子设备800具有触控屏810。其中,电子设备800还可以为前述实施例中的电子设备900等,对此不作具体限制。其中,触控模组200可拆卸地装配于电子设备800上,且在触控模组200装配于电子设备800上时,触控模组200可作用于触控屏810以实现诸如按压、旋转以及滑动等实体触控操作,进而丰富用户的操作方式以及提升用户的实体操作体验。Please refer to FIG. 25 . FIG. 25 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic device system 20 in some embodiments of the present application. The electronic device system 20 may include an electronic device 800 and a touch module 200 . The electronic device 800 has a touch screen 810 . Wherein, the electronic device 800 may also be the electronic device 900 in the foregoing embodiments, etc., which is not specifically limited. Among them, the touch module 200 is detachably assembled on the electronic device 800, and when the touch module 200 is assembled on the electronic device 800, the touch module 200 can act on the touch screen 810 to realize functions such as pressing, rotating, etc. And physical touch operations such as sliding, thereby enriching the user's operation mode and improving the user's physical operation experience.

触控模组200Touch module 200

请参阅图26,图26是本申请一些实施例中触控模组200的结构拆分示意图。触控模组200可以包括装配件201以及设于装配件201上的触控组件202。装配件201可拆卸地装配于电子设备800上,进而实现触控模组200与电子设备800的可拆卸装配。触控组件202可以作用于电子设备800的触控屏810以实现实体控件的触控操作。Please refer to FIG. 26 . FIG. 26 is a schematic exploded view of the structure of the touch module 200 in some embodiments of the present application. The touch module 200 may include an assembly 201 and a touch component 202 disposed on the assembly 201 . The assembly part 201 is detachably assembled on the electronic device 800 , thereby realizing the detachable assembly of the touch module 200 and the electronic device 800 . The touch component 202 can act on the touch screen 810 of the electronic device 800 to realize the touch operation of physical controls.

具体而言,触控组件202装配于装配件201的一侧,装配件201的另一相背侧用于可拆卸地装配电子设备800,即触控组件202和电子设备800可分别装配于装配件201的相背两侧。其中,电子设备800可通过卡扣、磁吸、螺接等方式实现与装配件201的可拆卸装配。Specifically, the touch component 202 is assembled on one side of the assembly part 201, and the other opposite side of the assembly part 201 is used to detachably assemble the electronic device 800, that is, the touch control component 202 and the electronic device 800 can be respectively mounted on the assembly part. Opposite sides of accessory 201 . Wherein, the electronic device 800 can be detachably assembled with the assembly part 201 through buckle, magnetic attraction, screw connection and other ways.

装配件201具有连通装配件201的相背两侧的贯穿孔203。在触控模组200与电子设备800装配时,电子设备800可部分自贯穿孔203外露。触控组件202装配于装配件201的一侧,触控组件202具有穿设于贯穿孔203的触控端,该触控端可以延伸至装配件201的另一相背侧并作用于触控屏810以用于实现相应的触控操作。The assembly part 201 has through holes 203 communicating with opposite sides of the assembly part 201 . When the touch module 200 is assembled with the electronic device 800 , the electronic device 800 can be partially exposed from the through hole 203 . The touch component 202 is assembled on one side of the assembly 201, and the touch component 202 has a touch end that passes through the through hole 203, and the touch end can extend to the other back side of the assembly 201 and act on the touch The screen 810 is used to realize the corresponding touch operation.

其中,可以定义装配件201用于装配电子设备800的一侧为装配件201的内侧,装配件201背离内侧的一侧为装配件201的外侧。Wherein, the side of the assembly part 201 for assembling the electronic device 800 can be defined as the inside of the assembly part 201 , and the side of the assembly part 201 away from the inside is the outside of the assembly part 201 .

可以理解的,触控组件202可以为前述实施例中的触控组件(100、300、500),为了便于下文描述,可以将“触控组件100”定义为“第一触控组件210”、“触控组件300”定义为“第二触控组件220”、“触控组件500”定义为“第三触控组件230”。其中,装配件201上装配有第一触控组件210、第二触控组件220以及第三触控组件230中的至少一者。It can be understood that the touch component 202 can be the touch component (100, 300, 500) in the foregoing embodiments. For the convenience of the following description, the “touch component 100” can be defined as the “first touch component 210”, "Touch component 300" is defined as "second touch component 220", and "touch component 500" is defined as "third touch component 230". Wherein, at least one of the first touch component 210 , the second touch component 220 and the third touch component 230 is mounted on the assembly part 201 .

在一实施例中,贯穿孔203可以包括至少一个第一贯穿孔203a,与之对应地,触控组件202可以包括至少一个第一触控组件210,第一触控组件210与第一贯穿孔203a一一对应设置。如图26所示,第一贯穿孔203a和第一触控组件210分别设有两个,一个第一触控组件210的触控端可穿设于与之对应的一个第一贯穿孔203a,另一个第一触控组件210的触控端可穿设于与之对应的另一个第一贯穿孔203a。In an embodiment, the through hole 203 may include at least one first through hole 203a, and correspondingly, the touch component 202 may include at least one first touch component 210, and the first touch component 210 and the first through hole 203a is set in one-to-one correspondence. As shown in FIG. 26 , there are two first through holes 203a and two first touch components 210 respectively, and the touch end of a first touch component 210 can be passed through a corresponding first through hole 203a. The touch end of the other first touch component 210 can pass through another first through hole 203 a corresponding thereto.

结合参阅前述实施例中的触控组件100,第一触控组件210可以包括定位件110和旋钮120,定位件110装配于装配件201的一侧,旋钮120设于定位件110背离装配件201的一侧并可相对于定位件110转动。其中,旋钮120具有穿设于第一贯穿孔203a的触控端。With reference to the touch component 100 in the foregoing embodiments, the first touch component 210 may include a positioning part 110 and a knob 120, the positioning part 110 is assembled on one side of the assembly part 201, and the knob 120 is arranged on the positioning part 110 away from the assembly part 201 One side and can rotate relative to the positioning member 110. Wherein, the knob 120 has a touch-control end penetrating through the first through hole 203a.

具体而言,旋钮120上设有凸起部122,该凸起部122设于旋钮120靠近定位件110的一侧,并依次穿设于定位件110和第一贯穿孔203a。其中,凸起部122穿设于第一贯穿孔203a的端部即为前述的触控端。可以理解的,本实施例中的触控端可以理解为前述实施例中的触点121。Specifically, the knob 120 is provided with a protruding portion 122 , the protruding portion 122 is disposed on a side of the knob 120 close to the positioning member 110 , and passes through the positioning member 110 and the first through hole 203a in sequence. Wherein, the end of the protruding portion 122 penetrating through the first through hole 203 a is the aforementioned touch terminal. It can be understood that the touch terminal in this embodiment can be understood as the touch point 121 in the foregoing embodiments.

在一实施例中,定位件110可包括间隔设置的吸附部112和定位部113、以及连接吸附部112和定位部113的连接部114。其中,定位部113环绕于吸附部112的外围并与装配件201装配连接。可选地,定位部113环绕设于第一贯穿孔203a的外围,旋钮120与吸附部112转动连接。In an embodiment, the positioning member 110 may include a suction part 112 and a positioning part 113 arranged at intervals, and a connection part 114 connecting the suction part 112 and the positioning part 113 . Wherein, the positioning part 113 surrounds the periphery of the adsorption part 112 and is assembled and connected with the assembly part 201 . Optionally, the positioning part 113 is arranged around the periphery of the first through hole 203 a, and the knob 120 is rotatably connected with the adsorption part 112 .

在一实施例中,定位件110和旋钮120中的一者上设有若干个第一磁性件130、另一者上设有第二磁性件140。其中,在旋钮120相对于定位件110转动时,第二磁性件140能够与若干个第一磁性件130中的部分第一磁性件130相吸以定位旋钮120相对于定位件110的转动角度。In one embodiment, one of the positioning member 110 and the knob 120 is provided with a plurality of first magnetic members 130 , and the other is provided with a second magnetic member 140 . Wherein, when the knob 120 rotates relative to the positioning member 110 , the second magnetic member 140 can attract some of the first magnetic members 130 to locate the rotation angle of the knob 120 relative to the positioning member 110 .

进一步地,为了便于第一触控组件210与装配件201之间的装配,即定位件110与装配件201之间的装配,装配件201用于装配定位件110的一侧设有第一装配槽201a,该第一装配槽201a环绕于第一贯穿孔203a的外周缘,即第一装配槽201a可以呈环形,且连通第一贯穿孔203a。其中,定位件110嵌设于第一装配槽201a以实现与装配件201的装配连接。可选地,定位件110的定位部113嵌设于装配件201的第一装配槽201a,例如,定位部113可通过卡扣、磁吸,螺接等方式进行装配。Further, in order to facilitate the assembly between the first touch component 210 and the assembly part 201, that is, the assembly between the positioning part 110 and the assembly part 201, the side of the assembly part 201 for assembling the positioning part 110 is provided with a first assembly Groove 201a, the first fitting groove 201a surrounds the outer periphery of the first through hole 203a, that is, the first fitting groove 201a may be in a ring shape and communicate with the first through hole 203a. Wherein, the positioning part 110 is embedded in the first fitting groove 201 a to realize fitting connection with the fitting part 201 . Optionally, the positioning part 113 of the positioning part 110 is embedded in the first fitting groove 201 a of the assembly part 201 , for example, the positioning part 113 can be assembled by buckling, magnetic attraction, screwing and the like.

在一实施例中,定位部113可通过磁吸附的方式装配于装配件201上,即定位部113和装配件201中的一者上设有磁体、另一者上设有磁性件,通过磁吸使得定位部113可固定于装配件201上。可选地,定位部113和第一装配槽201a中的一者上设有磁体、另一者上设有磁性件。In one embodiment, the positioning part 113 can be assembled on the assembly part 201 by means of magnetic attraction, that is, one of the positioning part 113 and the assembly part 201 is provided with a magnet, and the other is provided with a magnetic piece. The positioning part 113 can be fixed on the assembly part 201 . Optionally, a magnet is provided on one of the positioning portion 113 and the first assembly groove 201a, and a magnetic piece is provided on the other.

当然,在其他实施例中,装配件201可取消第一装配槽201a的设置,即定位部113环绕于第一贯穿孔203a的外围设置。Of course, in other embodiments, the assembly part 201 can cancel the setting of the first assembly groove 201a, that is, the positioning portion 113 is arranged around the periphery of the first through hole 203a.

在一实施例中,装配件201和定位件110中的一者上设有第一定位部118、另一者上设有第二定位部119,第一定位部118和第二定位部119相配合以对定位件110进行定位。可选地,第一装配槽201a的底壁和定位件110的定位部113中的一者上设有第一定位部118、另一者上设有第二定位部119。其中,第一定位部118和第二定位部119中的一者可为凹槽、另一者可为凸起。当然,在其他实施方式中,第一定位部118和第二定位部119还可以为其他定位结构,不作赘述。In one embodiment, one of the assembly part 201 and the positioning part 110 is provided with a first positioning part 118, and the other is provided with a second positioning part 119, and the first positioning part 118 and the second positioning part 119 are opposite to each other. cooperate to position the positioning member 110 . Optionally, one of the bottom wall of the first assembly groove 201 a and the positioning portion 113 of the positioning member 110 is provided with a first positioning portion 118 , and the other is provided with a second positioning portion 119 . Wherein, one of the first positioning portion 118 and the second positioning portion 119 may be a groove, and the other may be a protrusion. Certainly, in other implementation manners, the first positioning part 118 and the second positioning part 119 may also be other positioning structures, which will not be described in detail.

可以理解的,本实施例中第一触控组件210未尽详述的技术特征可参考前述实施例中触控组件100的具体描述,故此不再进行赘述。It can be understood that the technical features of the first touch component 210 in this embodiment that are not described in detail can refer to the specific description of the touch component 100 in the previous embodiment, so no more details are given here.

在一实施例中,贯穿孔203可以包括至少一个第二贯穿孔203b,与之对应地,触控组件202可以包括至少一个第二触控组件220,第二触控组件220与第二贯穿孔203b一一对应设置。其中,第二触控组件220的触控端可穿设于第二贯穿孔203b以作用于触控屏810实现触控操作。In an embodiment, the through hole 203 may include at least one second through hole 203b, and correspondingly, the touch component 202 may include at least one second touch component 220, and the second touch component 220 and the second through hole 203b is set in one-to-one correspondence. Wherein, the touch end of the second touch component 220 can be passed through the second through hole 203b to act on the touch screen 810 to realize touch operation.

结合参阅前述实施例中的触控组件300,第二触控组件220可以包括定位组件310、按键组件320以及复位组件330。定位组件310装配于装配件201上。按键组件320设于定位组件310上并可在第二贯穿孔203b的轴向上移动,以使得按键组件320在初始状态和按压状态之间进行切换。复位组件330设于定位组件310和按键组件320之间,并能够将按键组件320定位于初始状态。Referring to the touch component 300 in the foregoing embodiments, the second touch component 220 may include a positioning component 310 , a button component 320 and a reset component 330 . The positioning component 310 is assembled on the assembly part 201 . The button assembly 320 is disposed on the positioning assembly 310 and can move in the axial direction of the second through hole 203b, so that the button assembly 320 is switched between the initial state and the pressed state. The reset component 330 is disposed between the positioning component 310 and the key component 320, and can position the key component 320 in an initial state.

其中,按键组件320在按压状态时可作用于触控屏810以实现触控操作,复位组件330可使得按键组件320回归初始状态。Wherein, the button assembly 320 can act on the touch screen 810 to realize the touch operation when in the pressed state, and the reset assembly 330 can make the button assembly 320 return to the initial state.

在一实施例中,定位组件310可以包括装配于装配件201上的第一定位件311。可选地,第一定位件311可以环绕于第二贯穿孔203b设置。In one embodiment, the positioning assembly 310 may include a first positioning member 311 assembled on the assembly part 201 . Optionally, the first positioning member 311 may be disposed around the second through hole 203b.

按键组件320可以包括设于第一定位件311上的活动件321,该活动件321可以第二贯穿孔203b的轴向上移动以作用于触控屏810。The button assembly 320 may include a movable member 321 disposed on the first positioning member 311 , and the movable member 321 can move in the axial direction of the second through hole 203 b to act on the touch screen 810 .

在一实施例中,第一定位件311靠近装配件201的一侧设有容置槽311a,该容置槽311a的槽口朝向触控屏810。活动件321具有至少部分设于容置槽311a内的主体部321a以及设于主体部321a的周侧上的限位部321b。其中,主体部321a可以在容置槽311a内移动以作用于触控屏810,限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁相配合以限位主体部321a的移动行程。具体而言,活动件321在复位组件330的作用下回归初始状态时,当限位部321b抵触于容置槽311a底壁时即可认为活动件321和按键组件320回归了初始状态。In one embodiment, a receiving groove 311 a is formed on a side of the first positioning member 311 close to the assembly part 201 , and a notch of the receiving groove 311 a faces the touch screen 810 . The movable member 321 has a main body portion 321a at least partially disposed in the receiving groove 311a and a limiting portion 321b disposed on a peripheral side of the main body portion 321a. Wherein, the main body part 321a can move in the receiving groove 311a to act on the touch screen 810, and the limiting part 321b cooperates with the bottom wall of the receiving groove 311a to limit the moving stroke of the main body part 321a. Specifically, when the movable part 321 returns to the initial state under the action of the reset assembly 330 , when the limiting part 321b is in contact with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a, the movable part 321 and the button assembly 320 can be considered to have returned to the initial state.

在一实施例中,按键组件320还可以包括按压件322,该按压件322设于第一定位件311背离装配件201的一侧。其中,按压件322与主体部321a相抵触,主体部321a背离按压件322的端部为前述触控端。In an embodiment, the button assembly 320 may further include a pressing member 322 disposed on a side of the first positioning member 311 away from the assembly member 201 . Wherein, the pressing member 322 is in contact with the main body portion 321a, and the end of the main body portion 321a away from the pressing member 322 is the aforementioned touch end.

在一实施例中,复位组件330可以包括第一弹性件333,该第一弹性件333的一端连接或者抵接于第一定位件311、另一端连接或者抵接于活动件321或者按压件322,在按压状态时,第一弹性件333发生形变产生第一弹力,该第一弹力可驱动按键组件320回归初始状态。In one embodiment, the reset assembly 330 may include a first elastic member 333, one end of the first elastic member 333 is connected or abutted against the first positioning member 311, and the other end is connected or abutted against the movable member 321 or the pressing member 322 , in the pressed state, the first elastic member 333 is deformed to generate a first elastic force, and the first elastic force can drive the button assembly 320 to return to the initial state.

在一实施例中,复位组件330可以包括第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332。第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332中的一者可以设于第一定位件311上、另一者设于活动件321或者按压件322上。In an embodiment, the reset assembly 330 may include a first magnetic component 331 and a second magnetic component 332 . One of the first magnetic part 331 and the second magnetic part 332 may be disposed on the first positioning part 311 , and the other may be disposed on the movable part 321 or the pressing part 322 .

其中,第一磁性件331和第二磁性件332之间形成有可驱动按键组件320回归初始状态的第一磁力。Wherein, a first magnetic force is formed between the first magnetic member 331 and the second magnetic member 332 , which can drive the button assembly 320 to return to the initial state.

在一实施例中,定位组件310还可以包括穿设于第二贯穿孔203b的第二定位件312,该第二定位件312盖设于容置槽311a的槽口。In one embodiment, the positioning assembly 310 may further include a second positioning member 312 passing through the second through hole 203b, and the second positioning member 312 covers the notch of the accommodating groove 311a.

其中,活动件321可以与第二定位件312相抵触或者分离,第二定位件312背离活动件321的端部为前述触控端。可选地,按键组件320和第二定位件312可以采用导电材料制成。Wherein, the movable part 321 can be in conflict with or separated from the second positioning part 312 , and the end of the second positioning part 312 facing away from the movable part 321 is the aforementioned touch-control end. Optionally, the button assembly 320 and the second positioning member 312 can be made of conductive materials.

在一实施例中,复位组件330可以包括第二弹性件,该第二弹性件的一端连接或者抵接于第二定位件312、另一端连接或者抵接于活动件321,在按压状态时,第二弹性件发生形变产生第二弹力,该第二弹力可驱动按键组件320回归初始状态。In one embodiment, the reset assembly 330 may include a second elastic member, one end of which is connected or abutted against the second positioning member 312, and the other end is connected or abutted against the movable member 321, and in the pressed state, The second elastic member is deformed to generate a second elastic force, and the second elastic force can drive the button assembly 320 to return to the original state.

在一实施例中,复位组件330可以包括第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336。第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336中的一者可以设于活动件321上、另一者可以设于第二定位件312上。其中,第三磁性件335和第四磁性件336之间形成有可驱动按键组件320回归初始状态的第二磁力。In an embodiment, the reset assembly 330 may include a third magnetic component 335 and a fourth magnetic component 336 . One of the third magnetic part 335 and the fourth magnetic part 336 may be disposed on the movable part 321 , and the other may be disposed on the second positioning part 312 . Wherein, a second magnetic force is formed between the third magnetic member 335 and the fourth magnetic member 336 to drive the button assembly 320 to return to the initial state.

在一实施例中,第二定位件312上设有多个限位柱312a,该多个限位柱312a在活动件321的周侧上依次间隔设置。其中,相邻两个限位柱312a之间形成用于引导限位部312b在第二贯穿孔203b的轴向上移动的限位槽312b。限位槽312b可以引导活动件321在沿靠近或者远离第二定位件312的方向上移动,以避免活动件321的移动出现偏移现象。而限位柱312a可以限制活动件321在移动时出现自转现象。In one embodiment, the second positioning member 312 is provided with a plurality of limiting columns 312 a , and the plurality of limiting columns 312 a are sequentially arranged at intervals on the peripheral side of the movable member 321 . Wherein, a limiting slot 312b for guiding the limiting portion 312b to move in the axial direction of the second through hole 203b is formed between two adjacent limiting columns 312a. The limit slot 312b can guide the movable part 321 to move in a direction approaching or away from the second positioning part 312, so as to avoid the phenomenon of deviation in the movement of the movable part 321. The limit column 312a can limit the self-rotation phenomenon of the movable part 321 when moving.

在一实施例中,装配件201用于装配第一定位件311的一侧设有第二装配槽201b,该第二装配槽201b环绕于第二贯穿孔203b的外周缘,即第二装配槽201b可以呈环形,且连通第二贯穿孔203b。其中,第一定位件311嵌设于第二装配槽201b以实现与装配件201的装配连接。可选地,第一定位件311可以通过卡扣、磁吸,螺接等方式进行装配。In one embodiment, the side of the assembly part 201 for assembling the first positioning part 311 is provided with a second assembly groove 201b, and the second assembly groove 201b surrounds the outer periphery of the second through hole 203b, that is, the second assembly groove 201b may be annular and communicate with the second through hole 203b. Wherein, the first positioning part 311 is embedded in the second fitting groove 201 b to realize fitting connection with the fitting part 201 . Optionally, the first positioning member 311 can be assembled by means of buckle, magnetic attraction, screw connection and the like.

请参阅图27,图27是本申请一些实施例中第二触控组件220的结构拆分示意图。该实施例与前述实施例中触控组件300的区别在于:第一定位件311的周侧上设有环绕于容置槽311a的槽口的法兰凸起311c。该法兰凸起311c可以嵌设于第二装配槽201b以实现第一定位件311与装配件201的装配连接。其中,法兰凸起311c可通过卡扣、磁吸,螺接等方式实现与装配与装配件201的装配连接。例如,法兰凸起311c可通过磁吸附的方式装配于装配件201上,即法兰凸起311c和第二装配槽201b中的一者上设有磁体、另一者上设有磁性件,通过磁吸使得法兰凸起311c可固定于装配件201上。当然,在其他实施例中,装配件201上可取消第二装配槽201b的设置,即法兰凸起311c直接环绕于第二贯穿孔203b的外围设置,并装配于装配件201上。可选地,第一定位件311和装配件201中的一者上设有磁体、另一者上设有磁性件。Please refer to FIG. 27 . FIG. 27 is a schematic exploded view of the structure of the second touch component 220 in some embodiments of the present application. The difference between this embodiment and the touch assembly 300 in the previous embodiments is that: a flange protrusion 311c surrounding the notch of the accommodating groove 311a is disposed on the peripheral side of the first positioning member 311 . The flange protrusion 311c can be embedded in the second fitting groove 201b to realize fitting connection between the first positioning part 311 and the fitting part 201 . Wherein, the flange protrusion 311c can be assembled and connected with the assembly and the assembly part 201 through buckle, magnetic attraction, screw connection and the like. For example, the flange protrusion 311c can be assembled on the assembly part 201 by magnetic adsorption, that is, one of the flange protrusion 311c and the second assembly groove 201b is provided with a magnet, and the other is provided with a magnetic piece, The flange protrusion 311c can be fixed on the fitting 201 by magnetic attraction. Of course, in other embodiments, the setting of the second fitting groove 201b on the fitting 201 can be omitted, that is, the flange protrusion 311c is directly arranged around the periphery of the second through hole 203b and assembled on the fitting 201 . Optionally, one of the first positioning member 311 and the assembly member 201 is provided with a magnet, and the other is provided with a magnetic member.

在一实施例中,装配件201和第一定位件311中的一者上设有第三定位部205、另一者上设有第四定位部206,第三定位部205和第四定位部206相配合以对第一定位件311进行定位。可选地,第二装配槽201b的底壁和第一定位件311的法兰凸起311c中的一者上设有第三定位部205、另一者上设有第四定位部206。其中,第三定位部205和第四定位部206中的一者可为凹槽、另一者可为凸起。当然,在其他实施方式中,第三定位部205和第四定位部206还可以为其他定位结构,不作赘述。In one embodiment, one of the assembly part 201 and the first positioning part 311 is provided with a third positioning part 205, and the other is provided with a fourth positioning part 206, and the third positioning part 205 and the fourth positioning part 206 for positioning the first positioning member 311 . Optionally, one of the bottom wall of the second assembly groove 201b and the flange protrusion 311c of the first positioning member 311 is provided with a third positioning portion 205 , and the other is provided with a fourth positioning portion 206 . Wherein, one of the third positioning portion 205 and the fourth positioning portion 206 may be a groove, and the other may be a protrusion. Certainly, in other implementation manners, the third positioning part 205 and the fourth positioning part 206 may also be other positioning structures, which will not be described in detail.

可以理解的,本实施例中第二触控组件220未尽详述的技术特征可参考前述实施例中触控组件300的具体描述,故此不再进行赘述。It can be understood that the technical features of the second touch component 220 in this embodiment that are not described in detail can refer to the specific description of the touch component 300 in the previous embodiment, so no more details are given here.

在一实施例中,贯穿孔203可以包括至少一个第三贯穿孔203c,与之对应地,触控组件202可以包括至少一个第三触控组件230,第三触控组件230与第三贯穿孔203c一一对应设置。其中,第三触控组件230的触控端可穿设于第三贯穿孔203c以作用于触控屏810实现触控操作。In an embodiment, the through hole 203 may include at least one third through hole 203c, and correspondingly, the touch component 202 may include at least one third touch component 230, and the third touch component 230 and the third through hole 203c is set in one-to-one correspondence. Wherein, the touch terminal of the third touch component 230 can be passed through the third through hole 203c to act on the touch screen 810 to realize touch operation.

结合参阅前述实施例中的触控组件500,第三触控组件230可以包括固定件510、摇杆组件520以及归位组件530。固定件510装配于装配件201上,摇杆组件520穿设于固定件510并可相对于固定件510移动,摇杆组件520具有穿设于第三贯穿孔203c的触控端。Referring to the touch component 500 in the foregoing embodiments, the third touch component 230 may include a fixing member 510 , a rocker component 520 and a reset component 530 . The fixing part 510 is assembled on the assembly part 201 , the rocker assembly 520 passes through the fixing part 510 and can move relative to the fixing part 510 , and the rocker assembly 520 has a touch end passing through the third through hole 203c.

归位组件530设于固定件510和/或者摇杆组件520上,并被配置为用于提供摇杆组件520自目标位置向初始位置移动的作用力。The reset assembly 530 is disposed on the fixing member 510 and/or the rocker assembly 520 and is configured to provide an active force for the rocker assembly 520 to move from the target position to the initial position.

在一实施例中,固定件510可以环绕于第三贯穿孔203c设置。固定件510具有收容槽511以及连通收容槽511的孔512。收容槽511设于固定件510靠近装配件201的一侧,并在触控组件500装配于电子设备800上时,收容槽511的槽口朝向触控屏810。孔512连通至收容槽511背离固定件510的一侧。摇杆组件520具有设于收容槽511内的第一部分521以及穿设于孔512的第二部分522。其中,第一部分521可为前述触控端并可在收容槽511内移动。第二部分522突出于固定件510的表面设置,并在接受外力作用时可带动第一部分521在收容槽511内移动,以使得第一部分521能够接触于触控屏810的初始位置和目标位置。In one embodiment, the fixing member 510 may be disposed around the third through hole 203c. The fixing member 510 has a receiving groove 511 and a hole 512 communicating with the receiving groove 511 . The receiving groove 511 is disposed on a side of the fixing member 510 close to the assembly part 201 , and when the touch component 500 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the notch of the receiving groove 511 faces the touch screen 810 . The hole 512 communicates with a side of the receiving groove 511 away from the fixing member 510 . The rocker assembly 520 has a first portion 521 disposed in the receiving groove 511 and a second portion 522 passed through the hole 512 . Wherein, the first part 521 can be the aforementioned touch terminal and can move in the receiving groove 511 . The second portion 522 protrudes from the surface of the fixing member 510 , and can drive the first portion 521 to move in the receiving groove 511 when receiving an external force, so that the first portion 521 can contact the initial position and the target position of the touch screen 810 .

摇杆组件520还可以具有第三部分523,该第三部分523设于第二部分522背离第一部分521的一侧并连接于第二部分522。其中,该第三部分523可以与固定件510间隔设置,并被配置为用于接受外力,以带动第一部分521和第二部分522移动。可选地,第三部分523在孔512的径向上的宽度不小于孔512的径向宽度。The rocker assembly 520 can also have a third part 523 , which is disposed on a side of the second part 522 away from the first part 521 and connected to the second part 522 . Wherein, the third part 523 can be spaced apart from the fixing part 510 and configured to receive an external force to drive the first part 521 and the second part 522 to move. Optionally, the width of the third portion 523 in the radial direction of the hole 512 is not smaller than the radial width of the hole 512 .

在一实施例中,归位组件530可以包括设于收容槽511内的弹性件533,该弹性件533的一端连接或者抵接于收容槽511的侧壁、另一端连接或者抵接于第一部分521。和/或者,归位组件530可以包括设于孔512内的弹性件533,该弹性件533的一端连接或者抵接于孔512的内壁、另一端连接或者抵接于第二部分522。其中,在第一部分521与触控屏810的目标位置接触时,弹性件533可以发生形变产生弹力,该弹力被配置为用于驱动第一部分521自目标位置向初始位置移动。此外,弹性件533还可以将第一部分521定位于初始位置。In one embodiment, the reset assembly 530 may include an elastic member 533 disposed in the receiving groove 511, one end of the elastic member 533 is connected or abutted against the side wall of the receiving groove 511, and the other end is connected or abutted against the first part. 521. And/or, the reset assembly 530 may include an elastic member 533 disposed in the hole 512 , one end of the elastic member 533 is connected or abuts against the inner wall of the hole 512 , and the other end is connected or abutted against the second portion 522 . Wherein, when the first part 521 is in contact with the target position of the touch screen 810, the elastic member 533 can be deformed to generate elastic force, and the elastic force is configured to drive the first part 521 to move from the target position to the initial position. In addition, the elastic member 533 can also position the first portion 521 at an initial position.

在一实施例中,归位组件530可以包括第五磁性件(即第一磁性件531)和第六磁性件(即第二磁性件532),第五磁性件和第六磁性件之间具有用于驱动摇杆组件520自目标位置向初始位置移动的磁力。In one embodiment, the homing assembly 530 may include a fifth magnetic piece (ie, the first magnetic piece 531) and a sixth magnetic piece (ie, the second magnetic piece 532), and there is a gap between the fifth magnetic piece and the sixth magnetic piece. The magnetic force used to drive the rocker assembly 520 to move from the target position to the initial position.

其中,第五磁性件和第六磁性件中的一者可以设于第一部分521上、另一者设于收容槽511的侧壁上。和/或者,第五磁性件和第六磁性件中的一者可以设于第二部分522上、另一者设于孔512的内壁上。Wherein, one of the fifth magnetic component and the sixth magnetic component can be disposed on the first portion 521 , and the other one is disposed on the side wall of the receiving groove 511 . And/or, one of the fifth magnetic component and the sixth magnetic component may be disposed on the second portion 522 , and the other one may be disposed on the inner wall of the hole 512 .

在一实施例中,装配件201用于装配固定件510的一侧设有第三装配槽201c,该第三装配槽201c环绕于第三贯穿孔203c的外周缘,即第三装配槽201c可以呈环形,且连通第三贯穿孔203c。其中,固定件510可以嵌设于第三装配槽201c以实现与装配件201的装配连接。可选地,固定件510可以通过卡扣、磁吸,螺接等方式进行装配。In one embodiment, the side of the assembly part 201 for assembling the fixing part 510 is provided with a third assembly groove 201c, and the third assembly groove 201c surrounds the outer periphery of the third through hole 203c, that is, the third assembly groove 201c can be It is annular and communicates with the third through hole 203c. Wherein, the fixing part 510 can be embedded in the third fitting groove 201c to realize fitting connection with the fitting part 201 . Optionally, the fixing member 510 can be assembled by means of buckle, magnetic attraction, screw connection and the like.

可选地,固定件510可通过磁吸附的方式装配于装配件201上,即固定件510和装配件201中的一者上设有磁体、另一者上设有磁性件,通过磁吸使得固定件510可固定于装配件201上。可选地,固定件510和第三装配槽201c中的一者上设有磁体、另一者上设有磁性件。当然,在其他实施例中,装配件201上可取消第三装配槽201c的设置,即固定件510直接环绕于第三贯穿孔203c的外围设置。Optionally, the fixing part 510 can be assembled on the assembly part 201 by means of magnetic attraction, that is, one of the fixing part 510 and the assembly part 201 is provided with a magnet, and the other is provided with a magnetic part, and the fixed part is fixed by magnetic attraction. The part 510 can be fixed on the assembly part 201 . Optionally, a magnet is provided on one of the fixing member 510 and the third assembly groove 201c, and a magnetic member is provided on the other. Certainly, in other embodiments, the setting of the third fitting groove 201c on the fitting part 201 can be omitted, that is, the fixing part 510 is directly arranged around the periphery of the third through hole 203c.

在一实施例中,装配件201和固定件510中的一者上设有第五定位部、另一者上设有第六定位部,第五定位部和第六定位部相配合以对固定件510进行定位。其中,第五定位部和第六定位部的配合方式可参考前述实施例中第一定位部和第二定位部的配合方式或者第三定位部与第四定位部的配合方式,故本实施例中不再进行赘述。In one embodiment, one of the assembly part 201 and the fixing part 510 is provided with a fifth positioning part, and the other is provided with a sixth positioning part, and the fifth positioning part and the sixth positioning part cooperate to fix Part 510 is positioned. Wherein, the cooperation mode of the fifth positioning part and the sixth positioning part can refer to the cooperation mode of the first positioning part and the second positioning part or the cooperation mode of the third positioning part and the fourth positioning part in the previous embodiment, so this embodiment will not be described in detail.

可以理解的,本实施例中第三触控组件230未尽详述的技术特征可参考前述实施例中触控组件500的具体描述,故此不再进行赘述。It can be understood that the technical features of the third touch component 230 in this embodiment that are not described in detail can refer to the specific description of the touch component 500 in the previous embodiment, so no more details are given here.

再次参阅图26,装配件201大致呈板状,其具有相背设置的内侧和外侧,电子设备800可装配于装配件201的内侧,触控组件202可以装配于装配件201的外侧,以便于用户进行触控操作。然而,板状的装配件201在于电子设备800进行装配时,存在定位不方便以及容易发生错位,不利于用户的触控操作体验。Referring to FIG. 26 again, the assembly 201 is roughly plate-shaped, and has an inner side and an outer side opposite to each other. The electronic device 800 can be assembled on the inner side of the assembly 201, and the touch control component 202 can be assembled on the outside of the assembly 201, so that The user performs a touch operation. However, when the plate-shaped assembly part 201 is assembled with the electronic device 800 , it is inconvenient to locate and easily misplaced, which is not conducive to the user's touch operation experience.

基于此,本申请进一步对装配件201进行改进,以提升用户体验。Based on this, the present application further improves the assembly part 201 to enhance user experience.

请参阅图28,图28是本申请另一些实施例中装配件201的结构示意图,该实施例与前述实施例中触控模组的区别在于:装配件201的结构不同。其中,装配件201可以包括第一板体250和侧板260。Please refer to FIG. 28 . FIG. 28 is a schematic structural diagram of an assembly part 201 in another embodiment of the present application. The difference between this embodiment and the touch module in the previous embodiment is that the structure of the assembly part 201 is different. Wherein, the assembly part 201 may include a first plate body 250 and a side plate 260 .

第一板体250具有相背设置的内侧和外侧,侧板260设于第一板体250的内侧并与第一板体250弯折连接。换言之,第一板体250和侧板260配合围设形成大致呈槽体状结构的装配件201,槽体状结构的槽口侧即为装配件201的内侧、背离槽体状结构的槽口的一侧即为装配件201的外侧。贯穿孔203贯穿第一板体250,即第一贯穿孔203a、第二贯穿孔203b以及第三贯穿孔203c分别贯穿第一板体250。触控组件202可以装配于第一板体250或者侧板260的外侧,即触控组件202可以装配于装配件201的外侧。电子设备800可以装配于第一板体250或者侧板260的内侧,即电子设备800可以装配于装配件201的内侧。The first plate body 250 has an inner side and an outer side disposed opposite to each other. The side plate 260 is disposed on the inner side of the first plate body 250 and connected to the first plate body 250 by bending. In other words, the first plate body 250 and the side plate 260 cooperate to form the assembly part 201 with a roughly tank-shaped structure, and the notch side of the tank-shaped structure is the inner side of the assembly part 201, away from the notch of the tank-shaped structure One side of is the outer side of the assembly 201. The through hole 203 runs through the first plate body 250 , that is, the first through hole 203 a , the second through hole 203 b and the third through hole 203 c respectively pass through the first plate body 250 . The touch component 202 can be assembled on the outside of the first plate body 250 or the side plate 260 , that is, the touch component 202 can be assembled on the outside of the assembly part 201 . The electronic device 800 can be assembled inside the first board body 250 or the side board 260 , that is, the electronic device 800 can be assembled inside the assembly part 201 .

其中,电子设备800装配于装配件201的内侧时可以使得触控屏810与第一板体250相对设置,且电子设备800可以抵触于侧板260,从而可以快速地实现电子设备800与装配件201的定位以及装配。Wherein, when the electronic device 800 is assembled on the inner side of the assembly part 201, the touch screen 810 can be arranged opposite to the first board body 250, and the electronic device 800 can interfere with the side plate 260, so that the electronic device 800 and the assembly part can be quickly realized. 201 positioning and assembly.

请参阅图29,图29是本申请另一些实施例中装配件201的结构示意图,该实施例与前述实施例中触控模组的区别在于:装配件201的结构不同。其中,装配件201可以包括相对设置的第一板体250和第二板体270、以及设于第一板体250和第二板体270之间的侧板260。Please refer to FIG. 29 . FIG. 29 is a schematic structural diagram of an assembly part 201 in another embodiment of the present application. The difference between this embodiment and the touch module in the previous embodiment is that the structure of the assembly part 201 is different. Wherein, the assembly part 201 may include a first plate body 250 and a second plate body 270 disposed opposite to each other, and a side plate 260 disposed between the first plate body 250 and the second plate body 270 .

其中,第一板体250、第二板体270以及侧板260围设形成装配件201的外轮廓,且使得装配件201大致呈一端具有开口的盒状结构。电子设备800可自上述开口装配于第一板体250和第二板体270之间,侧板260可以限位电子设备800进入装配件201内的移动行程。Wherein, the first plate body 250 , the second plate body 270 and the side plate 260 surround and form the outer contour of the assembly part 201 , and make the assembly part 201 generally have a box-like structure with an opening at one end. The electronic device 800 can be assembled between the first plate body 250 and the second plate body 270 through the above opening, and the side plate 260 can limit the movement of the electronic device 800 into the assembly part 201 .

可以理解的,通过间隔设置的第一板体250和第二板体270,并配合侧板260,可以在电子设备800的一端进入装配件201内时对电子设备800进行多方位的限制,一方面在用户使用触控模组200对电子设备800执行触控操作时可以很方便地进行握持,另一方面在用户使用触控模组200执行触控操作时装配件201与电子设备800之间不会发生错位。It can be understood that the electronic device 800 can be restrained in multiple directions when one end of the electronic device 800 enters the assembly part 201 through the first plate body 250 and the second plate body 270 arranged at intervals, and cooperates with the side plate 260 . On the one hand, when the user uses the touch module 200 to perform a touch operation on the electronic device 800, it can be conveniently held; No misalignment will occur.

在一实施例中,第二板体270靠近第一板体250的一侧设有调节件280,该调节件280可以在电子设备800装配于第一板体250和第二板体270之间时抵触于电子设备800背离第一板体250的一侧,从而使得触控组件202可以充分作用于触控屏810,以保证触控操作的效果。In one embodiment, the side of the second board 270 close to the first board 250 is provided with an adjustment member 280 , and the adjustment member 280 can be assembled between the first board 250 and the second board 270 when the electronic device 800 At the same time, it interferes with the side of the electronic device 800 away from the first board 250 , so that the touch component 202 can fully act on the touch screen 810 to ensure the effect of the touch operation.

其中,调节件280可以采用诸如橡胶、硅胶等弹性材料制成,以使得同一触控模组200可以适配不同厚度的电子设备800,以提升触控模组200的通用性。可以理解的,调节件280可以为设于第二板体270上的筋条结构,或者可以为覆盖于第二板体270上的片状结构等。Wherein, the adjusting member 280 can be made of elastic materials such as rubber, silicone, etc., so that the same touch module 200 can adapt to electronic devices 800 of different thicknesses, so as to improve the versatility of the touch module 200 . It can be understood that the adjusting member 280 may be a rib structure provided on the second plate body 270 , or may be a sheet structure covering the second plate body 270 .

当然,在其他实施例中,第一板体250靠近第二板体270的一侧上也可设有调节件280,此时调节件280需要避让贯穿孔203设置。此外如前述,装配件201上装配有第一触控组件210、第二触控组件220以及第三触控组件230中的至少一者。第一触控组件210、第二触控组件220或第三触控组件230可装配于第一板体250和/或者第二板体270上。Certainly, in other embodiments, the adjusting member 280 may also be provided on the side of the first plate body 250 close to the second plate body 270 . In addition, as mentioned above, at least one of the first touch component 210 , the second touch component 220 and the third touch component 230 is mounted on the assembly part 201 . The first touch component 210 , the second touch component 220 or the third touch component 230 can be assembled on the first board 250 and/or the second board 270 .

请参阅图30和图31,图30是本申请另一些实施例中触控模组200的结构示意图,图31是图30实施例中触控模组200的结构拆分示意图。Please refer to FIG. 30 and FIG. 31 , FIG. 30 is a schematic structural diagram of the touch module 200 in another embodiment of the present application, and FIG. 31 is a schematic disassembled structural diagram of the touch module 200 in the embodiment of FIG. 30 .

如前述,装配件201上装配有第一触控组件210、第二触控组件220以及第三触控组件230中的至少一者。以装配件201上装配有第一触控组件210和第二触控组件220为例,第一触控组件210和第二触控组件220分别设有多个,多个第一触控组件210装配于装配件201的第一板体250上。多个第二触控组件220中的部分第二触控组件220装配于装配件201的第一板体250上、另一部分装配于侧板260上。As mentioned above, at least one of the first touch component 210 , the second touch component 220 and the third touch component 230 is mounted on the assembly part 201 . Taking the first touch component 210 and the second touch component 220 mounted on the assembly part 201 as an example, there are multiple first touch components 210 and second touch components 220 respectively, and multiple first touch components 210 Assembled on the first plate body 250 of the assembly part 201 . Part of the second touch components 220 among the plurality of second touch components 220 is mounted on the first board 250 of the assembly part 201 , and another part is mounted on the side board 260 .

换言之,第二贯穿孔203b和第二触控组件220可以分别设有多个,部分第二贯穿孔203b贯穿于侧板260、另一部分第二贯穿孔203b贯穿于第一板体250。即通过将第二触控组件220设于装配件201的不同位置可以实现不同的触控使用体验,丰富操作多样性。In other words, a plurality of second through holes 203 b and second touch component 220 may be respectively provided, some of the second through holes 203 b penetrate through the side plate 260 , and another part of the second through holes 203 b penetrate through the first plate body 250 . That is, by arranging the second touch component 220 at different positions of the assembly part 201 , different touch user experiences can be realized and the operation diversity can be enriched.

在一实施例中,装配件201上还设有对接口208,该对接口208被配置为用于暴露电子设备800的接口。其中,电子设备800通常具有用于实现充电的充电接口以及数据交换的数据线接口,而触控模组200通常装配于电子设备800的端部,即覆盖电子设备800的充电接口以及数据线接口。基于此,通过设置对接口208以暴露出电子设备的充电接口以及数据线接口,以满足用户的使用需求。可以理解的,当充电接口和数据线接口为分别单独设立的接口时,对接口208可以设有多个,并分别对应于数据线接口和充电接口。当充电接口和数据线接口为合并式的一个接口时,对接口208可以设有一个。In an embodiment, the fitting 201 is further provided with a docking port 208 configured to expose an interface of the electronic device 800 . Among them, the electronic device 800 usually has a charging interface for charging and a data line interface for data exchange, and the touch module 200 is usually assembled at the end of the electronic device 800, that is, covers the charging interface and the data line interface of the electronic device 800 . Based on this, the docking interface 208 is set to expose the charging interface and the data line interface of the electronic device, so as to meet the usage requirements of the user. It can be understood that when the charging interface and the data line interface are separately established interfaces, there may be multiple docking interfaces 208 corresponding to the data line interface and the charging interface respectively. When the charging interface and the data line interface are an integrated interface, one docking interface 208 may be provided.

在一实施例中,触控组件200还可以包括穿设于第二贯穿孔203b的触控件290,该触控件290穿设于侧板260上的第二贯穿孔203b。基于部分第二触控组件220装配于侧板260上,该触控件290被配置为装配于侧板260上的第二触控组件220的触控端。换言之,触控件260的一端与装配于侧板260上的第二触控组件220的定位组件310相接、另一端被配置为用于与触控屏810相接触。In an embodiment, the touch component 200 may further include a touch element 290 disposed through the second through hole 203 b, and the touch element 290 is disposed through the second through hole 203 b on the side plate 260 . Since part of the second touch component 220 is assembled on the side plate 260 , the touch element 290 is configured as a touch end of the second touch component 220 assembled on the side plate 260 . In other words, one end of the touch element 260 is in contact with the positioning component 310 of the second touch component 220 mounted on the side panel 260 , and the other end is configured to be in contact with the touch screen 810 .

其中,触控件290采用导电材料制成。Wherein, the touch element 290 is made of conductive material.

可以理解的,当定位组件310仅包括第一定位件311时,第一定位件311可以与触控件290可拆卸连接,此时,活动件321可以与触控件290对接或者分离,并在对接时,可以对触控屏810执行触控操作。It can be understood that when the positioning assembly 310 only includes the first positioning member 311, the first positioning member 311 can be detachably connected to the touch member 290. , a touch operation can be performed on the touch screen 810 .

当定位组件310包括第一定位件311和第二定位件312时,第一定位件311和/或者第二定位件312可以与触控件290可拆卸连接,并在连接时,第二定位件312与触控件290相接触。此时,活动件321可以与第二定位件312对接或者分离,并在对接时,可以对触控屏810执行触控操作。其中,第二定位件312和活动件321可采用导电材料制成。When the positioning assembly 310 includes the first positioning part 311 and the second positioning part 312, the first positioning part 311 and/or the second positioning part 312 can be detachably connected with the touch part 290, and when connected, the second positioning part 312 contact with the touch element 290 . At this time, the movable part 321 can be docked with or separated from the second positioning part 312 , and can perform a touch operation on the touch screen 810 when docked. Wherein, the second positioning member 312 and the movable member 321 can be made of conductive materials.

可以理解的,基于侧板260与触控屏910的位置关系以及触控件290与定位组件310的连接关系,触控件290与触控屏810之间形成较大面积的面接触可以保证触控操作的效果,触控件290与定位组件310之间形成较大面积的接触连接可以保证二者之间具有较为稳定的连接效果。It can be understood that, based on the positional relationship between the side panel 260 and the touch screen 910 and the connection relationship between the touch element 290 and the positioning component 310, a larger surface contact between the touch element 290 and the touch screen 810 can ensure touch operation. The effect of forming a relatively large area of contact connection between the touch element 290 and the positioning component 310 can ensure a relatively stable connection effect between the two.

基于此,在一实施例中,触控件290可以包括弯折连接的第一触控部291和第二触控部292,第一触控部291用于与触控屏810相接触,第二触控部292与定位组件310相接。第一触控部291可为板状或者条形状,且第一触控部291的一端可与触控屏810的触控面之间形成面接触,第一触控部291的另一端延伸至第二贯穿孔203b内或者穿设于第二贯穿孔203b以与第二触控部292弯折连接。此时,第二触控部292可与定位组件310之间具有较大的连接或者接触面积,以保证连接稳定性。可选地,第二触控部292可通过磁吸的方式与定位组件310实现连接,此时可以在第二触控部292上设置磁铁或者磁性件,并与第二触控组件220内部的磁性件相互吸引以实现定位连接。Based on this, in one embodiment, the touch element 290 may include a first touch part 291 and a second touch part 292 that are bent and connected, the first touch part 291 is used to contact the touch screen 810, and the second touch part The touch portion 292 is in contact with the positioning component 310 . The first touch portion 291 can be in the shape of a plate or a bar, and one end of the first touch portion 291 can form surface contact with the touch surface of the touch screen 810, and the other end of the first touch portion 291 extends to The second through hole 203b is disposed in or passed through the second through hole 203b so as to be bent and connected with the second touch portion 292 . At this time, the second touch part 292 may have a larger connection or contact area with the positioning component 310 to ensure connection stability. Optionally, the second touch part 292 can be connected with the positioning component 310 by means of magnetic attraction. At this time, a magnet or a magnetic piece can be set on the second touch part 292, and it can be connected with the inside of the second touch component 220. The magnetic pieces are attracted to each other to realize positioning connection.

当然,在其他实施方式中,第二触控部292和定位组件310还可以通过卡扣、粘接、螺接等连接方式实现连接,不作赘述。Of course, in other implementation manners, the second touch part 292 and the positioning component 310 can also be connected through buckling, bonding, screwing and other connection methods, which will not be repeated here.

可以理解的,上述实施例中虽然仅示例性地列举了第二触控组件220设于侧板260上的实施方式,但不限于此。例如,第一触控组件210和/或者第三触控组件230也可以设于侧板260上,并通过设置不同的触控件来实现其对应的触控操作,本领域技术人员在本申请实施例的启示下可以进行相应变形得出具体的技术方案,故此不再进行赘述。It can be understood that although the above-mentioned embodiment only exemplifies the embodiment in which the second touch component 220 is disposed on the side panel 260 , it is not limited thereto. For example, the first touch component 210 and/or the third touch component 230 can also be arranged on the side panel 260, and the corresponding touch operations can be realized by setting different touch elements. Under the inspiration of the example, corresponding deformation can be carried out to obtain a specific technical solution, so the details will not be repeated here.

基于装配件201上可以装配有第一触控组件210、第二触控组件220以及第三触控组件230中的至少一者,为此可以得出不同类型的触控模组200。例如前述实施例中具有第一触控组件210、第二触控组件220以及第三触控组件230的触控模组200。Based on the fact that at least one of the first touch component 210 , the second touch component 220 and the third touch component 230 can be mounted on the assembly part 201 , different types of touch modules 200 can be derived. For example, the touch module 200 having the first touch component 210 , the second touch component 220 and the third touch component 230 in the foregoing embodiments.

此外,触控模组200还可以仅仅具有第一触控组件210、第二触控组件220以及第三触控组件230中的一者或者多者,每一者的数量可以为一个或者多个。应理解的,本领域技术人员根据本申请的启示改变上述数量和种类而得出的技术方案均应在本申请保护范围内。In addition, the touch module 200 can only have one or more of the first touch component 210, the second touch component 220 and the third touch component 230, and the number of each can be one or more . It should be understood that technical solutions obtained by those skilled in the art by changing the above-mentioned quantities and types according to the teachings of the present application shall fall within the protection scope of the present application.

例如,本申请可以提供另外一种触控模组,该触控模组可以包括装配件以及第二触控组件,该装配件具有连通装配件的相背两侧的第二贯穿孔;第二触控组件设于装配件上。其中,第二触控组件装配于装配件的一侧,装配件的另一相背侧用于可拆卸地装配具有触控屏的电子设备。第二触控组件包括定位组件、按键组件、复位组件,定位组件装配于装配件上。按键组件设于定位组件上并可在第二贯穿孔的轴向上移动。复位组件设于定位组件和按键组件之间以用于对按键组件进行复位。按键组件或者定位组件具有穿设于第二贯穿孔的触控端,触控端可作用于触控屏以实现触控操作。For example, the present application may provide another touch module. The touch module may include an assembly and a second touch component. The assembly has a second through hole connecting the opposite sides of the assembly; the second The touch component is arranged on the assembly part. Wherein, the second touch component is assembled on one side of the assembly, and the other opposite back side of the assembly is used to detachably assemble the electronic device with the touch screen. The second touch component includes a positioning component, a button component and a reset component, and the positioning component is assembled on the assembly. The button assembly is arranged on the positioning assembly and can move in the axial direction of the second through hole. The reset component is arranged between the positioning component and the key component for resetting the key component. The button component or the positioning component has a touch terminal passing through the second through hole, and the touch terminal can act on the touch screen to realize touch operation.

又如,本申请还可以提供又一种触控模组,该触控模组可以包括装配件以及第三触控组件,装配件具有连通装配件的相背两侧的第三贯穿孔。第三触控组件设于所述装配件上。其中,第三触控组件装配于装配件的一侧,装配件的另一相背侧用于可拆卸地装配具有触控屏的电子设备。第三触控组件包括固定件、摇杆组件、归位组件,固定件装配于装配件上,摇杆组件穿设于固定件并可相对于固定件移动。归位组件设于固定件和/或者摇杆组件上,以用于对摇杆组件进行归位。摇杆组件具有穿设于第三贯穿孔的触控端,触控端可作用于触控屏以实现触控操作。As another example, the present application may also provide yet another touch module, which may include an assembly and a third touch component, and the assembly has a third through hole connecting opposite sides of the assembly. The third touch component is arranged on the assembly part. Wherein, the third touch component is assembled on one side of the assembly, and the other opposite back side of the assembly is used to detachably assemble an electronic device with a touch screen. The third touch component includes a fixing part, a rocker component, and a reset component. The fixing part is assembled on the assembly part, and the rocking bar component is passed through the fixing part and can move relative to the fixing part. The reset assembly is arranged on the fixing member and/or the rocker assembly for returning the rocker assembly. The rocker assembly has a touch end disposed through the third through hole, and the touch end can act on the touch screen to realize touch operation.

基于上述可以实现不同触控操作的触控模组,本申请可以提出多中电子设备系统,以满足不同的触控使用需求。Based on the above-mentioned touch modules that can realize different touch operations, the present application can propose multiple electronic device systems to meet different touch usage requirements.

例如,本申请可以提供一种电子设备系统,该电子设备系统可以包括电子设备和触控模组。电子设备具有触控屏。触控模组包括装配件以及设于装配件上的触控组件。其中,装配件具有连通装配件的相背两侧的贯穿孔,触控组件装配于装配件的一侧,电子设备可拆卸地装配于装配件的另一侧。触控组件具有穿设于贯穿孔的触控端,触控端可作用于触控屏以实现触控操作。For example, the present application may provide an electronic device system, and the electronic device system may include an electronic device and a touch module. Electronic devices have touch screens. The touch module includes an assembly and a touch component on the assembly. Wherein, the assembly part has through holes connecting opposite sides of the assembly part, the touch control component is assembled on one side of the assembly part, and the electronic device is detachably assembled on the other side of the assembly part. The touch component has a touch terminal disposed through the through hole, and the touch terminal can act on the touch screen to realize touch operation.

又如,本申请还可以提供一种电子设备系统,该电子设备系统可以包括电子设备和触控模组。电子设备具有触控屏。触控模组包括装配件、以及设于装配件上的第一触控组件。其中,第一触控组件装配于装配件的一侧,电子设备可拆卸地装配于装配件的另一侧。装配件具有贯穿装配件的第一贯穿孔;第一触控组件包括定位件以及旋钮,定位件装配于装配件上;旋钮设于定位件背离装配件的一侧并可相对于定位件移动。旋钮具有穿设于第一贯穿孔的触控端,触控端可作用于触控屏以实现触控操作。As another example, the present application may also provide an electronic device system, and the electronic device system may include an electronic device and a touch module. Electronic devices have touch screens. The touch module includes an assembly and a first touch component disposed on the assembly. Wherein, the first touch component is assembled on one side of the assembly, and the electronic device is detachably assembled on the other side of the assembly. The assembly part has a first through hole through the assembly part; the first touch component includes a positioning part and a knob, and the positioning part is assembled on the assembly part; the knob is arranged on a side of the positioning part away from the assembly part and can move relative to the positioning part. The knob has a touch end disposed through the first through hole, and the touch end can act on the touch screen to realize touch operation.

再如,本申请还可以提供一种电子设备系统,该电子设备系统可以包括电子设备和触控模组。电子设备具有触控屏。触控模组包括装配件、以及设于装配件上的第二触控组件。其中,第二触控组件装配于装配件的一侧,电子设备可拆卸地装配于装配件的另一侧。装配件具有贯穿装配件的第二贯穿孔。第二触控组件包括定位组件、按键组件以及复位组件,定位组件装配于装配件上。按键组件设于定位组件上并可在第二贯穿孔的轴向上移动。复位组件设于定位组件和按键组件之间以用于对按键组件进行复位。按键组件或者定位组件具有穿设于第二贯穿孔的触控端,触控端可作用于触控屏以实现触控操作。For another example, the present application may also provide an electronic device system, and the electronic device system may include an electronic device and a touch module. Electronic devices have touch screens. The touch module includes an assembly and a second touch component disposed on the assembly. Wherein, the second touch component is assembled on one side of the assembly, and the electronic device is detachably assembled on the other side of the assembly. The fitting has a second through hole penetrating through the fitting. The second touch component includes a positioning component, a button component and a reset component, and the positioning component is assembled on the assembly. The button assembly is arranged on the positioning assembly and can move in the axial direction of the second through hole. The reset component is arranged between the positioning component and the key component for resetting the key component. The button component or the positioning component has a touch terminal passing through the second through hole, and the touch terminal can act on the touch screen to realize touch operation.

再如,本申请还可以提供一种电子设备系统,该电子设备系统可以包括电子设备和触控模组。电子设备具有触控屏。触控模组包括装配件、以及设于装配件上的第三触控组件。其中,第三触控组件装配于装配件的一侧,电子设备可拆卸地装配于装配件的另一侧。装配件具有贯穿装配件的第三贯穿孔。第三触控组件包括固定件、摇杆组件以及归位组件,固定件装配于装配件上。摇杆组件穿设于固定件并可相对于固定件移动。归位组件设于固定件和/或者摇杆组件上,以用于对摇杆组件进行归位。摇杆组件具有穿设于第三贯穿孔的触控端,触控端可作用于触控屏以实现触控操作。For another example, the present application may also provide an electronic device system, and the electronic device system may include an electronic device and a touch module. Electronic devices have touch screens. The touch module includes an assembly and a third touch component disposed on the assembly. Wherein, the third touch component is assembled on one side of the assembly, and the electronic device is detachably assembled on the other side of the assembly. The fitting has a third through hole penetrating through the fitting. The third touch component includes a fixing part, a rocker component and a reset component, and the fixing part is assembled on the assembly part. The rocker assembly is passed through the fixing part and can move relative to the fixing part. The reset assembly is arranged on the fixing member and/or the rocker assembly for returning the rocker assembly. The rocker assembly has a touch end disposed through the third through hole, and the touch end can act on the touch screen to realize touch operation.

请参阅图32至图34,图32是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统20的结构示意图,图33是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统20的结构示意图,图34是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统20的结构示意图。其中,图32至图34中示意出了能够实现不同触控使用体验的电子设备系统20,但不限于此,图32至图34仅做示例性说明。Please refer to FIG. 32 to FIG. 34, FIG. 32 is a schematic structural diagram of the electronic equipment system 20 in other embodiments of the present application, FIG. 33 is a schematic structural diagram of the electronic equipment system 20 in other embodiments of the present application, and FIG. A schematic diagram of the structure of the electronic device system 20 in some embodiments. Wherein, FIG. 32 to FIG. 34 schematically illustrate the electronic device system 20 capable of realizing different touch user experiences, but is not limited thereto, and FIG. 32 to FIG. 34 are only illustrative illustrations.

如图32所示,触控模组200可以设于电子设备800的一端,且触控模组200可以包括设于装配件上的2个第一触控组件以及2个第二触控组件,第一触控组件可实现旋钮功能,第二触控组件可实现按钮功能。As shown in FIG. 32 , the touch module 200 may be disposed at one end of the electronic device 800, and the touch module 200 may include two first touch components and two second touch components disposed on the assembly, The first touch component can realize the function of the knob, and the second touch component can realize the function of the button.

如图32所示,触控模组200可以设有多个,多个触控模组200中的部分触控模组200设于电子设备800的一端、另一部分设于触控模组200的另一端。如图所示,触控模组200可以设有两个,两个触控模组200分别设于电子设备800的相对两端。其中,触控模组200可以包括设于装配件上的2个第一触控组件以及3个第二触控组件,第一触控组件可以实现旋钮功能,第二触控组件可以实现按钮功能。As shown in FIG. 32 , there may be multiple touch modules 200 , and some of the touch modules 200 of the multiple touch modules 200 are set at one end of the electronic device 800 , and the other part is set at the bottom of the touch module 200 . another side. As shown in the figure, there may be two touch modules 200 , and the two touch modules 200 are respectively arranged at opposite ends of the electronic device 800 . Among them, the touch module 200 can include two first touch components and three second touch components arranged on the assembly, the first touch component can realize the function of the knob, and the second touch component can realize the function of the button .

如图33所示,触控模组200可以设于电子设备800的角部区域,且触控模组200可以包括设于装配件上的4个第二触控组件。第二触控组件可实现按钮功能。As shown in FIG. 33 , the touch module 200 can be disposed at the corner area of the electronic device 800 , and the touch module 200 can include four second touch components disposed on the assembly. The second touch component can realize the button function.

可以理解的,图32至图34仅示例性地说明了一些触控模组200与电子设备800的配合方式以及设置方式,但不限于此。即触控模组200可以设有一个或者多个,并可以分布于电子设备的端部区域或者角部区域。且触控模组200上的第一触控组件、第二触控组件以及第三触控组件的数量以及分布方式可以相同或者不同。It can be understood that FIG. 32 to FIG. 34 only exemplarily illustrate some cooperation modes and configuration modes of the touch module 200 and the electronic device 800 , but are not limited thereto. That is, one or more touch modules 200 can be provided, and can be distributed in the end area or corner area of the electronic device. Moreover, the numbers and distribution methods of the first touch components, the second touch components and the third touch components on the touch module 200 may be the same or different.

请参阅图35至图37,图35是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统40的结构示意图,图36是图35实施例中电子设备系统40的一状态示意图,图37是图35实施例中电子设备系统40的另一状态示意图。Please refer to FIG. 35 to FIG. 37. FIG. 35 is a schematic structural diagram of the electronic equipment system 40 in another embodiment of the present application. FIG. 36 is a schematic diagram of a state of the electronic equipment system 40 in the embodiment of FIG. 35. FIG. 37 is a schematic diagram of the embodiment of FIG. 35 Another state diagram of the electronic equipment system 40 in FIG.

其中,装配件201可以为电子设备800的保护壳。Wherein, the assembly part 201 may be a protective shell of the electronic device 800 .

具体而言,电子设备800在使用过程中或者出现跌落、撞击等意外情况时,保护壳可以对电子设备800进行保护,以避免出现碰伤、刮伤等现象。其中,该电子设备800可以是平板电脑、手机、电子阅读器、遥控器、个人计算机、笔记本电脑、车载设备、网络电视、可穿戴设备等。下文电子设备800以手机为例进行说明。Specifically, when the electronic device 800 is in use or falls, hits and other accidents, the protective case can protect the electronic device 800 to avoid bumps, scratches and the like. Wherein, the electronic device 800 may be a tablet computer, a mobile phone, an e-reader, a remote controller, a personal computer, a notebook computer, a vehicle-mounted device, an Internet TV, a wearable device, and the like. The electronic device 800 will be described below by taking a mobile phone as an example.

可以理解的,保护壳可以为翻盖型保护壳,即保护壳(装配件201)可以包括能够进行相向或者相背运动的第一壳体410和第二壳体420,以使得电子设备系统40能够在第一状态和第二状态之间进行切换。It can be understood that the protective case may be a clamshell-type protective case, that is, the protective case (assembly part 201 ) may include a first housing 410 and a second housing 420 capable of moving toward or away from each other, so that the electronic device system 40 can Toggle between the first state and the second state.

其中,第一壳体410被配置为用于装配电子设备800或者电子设备900,第二壳体420被配置为用于装配触控组件430。可以理解的,触控组件430可以为前述实施例中的第一触控组件210、第二触控组件220以及第三触控组件230中的至少一者。Wherein, the first housing 410 is configured for assembling the electronic device 800 or the electronic device 900 , and the second housing 420 is configured for assembling the touch component 430 . It can be understood that the touch component 430 can be at least one of the first touch component 210 , the second touch component 220 and the third touch component 230 in the foregoing embodiments.

进一步地,第一壳体410的一侧形成有安装槽411,安装槽411的底壁设有避让孔412。在电子设备装配于安装槽411时,电子设备的触控屏自安装槽411的槽口外露,电子设备的摄像头可与避让孔412相对设置,以使得电子设备可通过避让孔412实现图像采集功能。Further, a mounting groove 411 is formed on one side of the first housing 410 , and an avoidance hole 412 is formed on the bottom wall of the mounting groove 411 . When the electronic device is assembled in the installation groove 411, the touch screen of the electronic device is exposed from the notch of the installation groove 411, and the camera of the electronic device can be set opposite to the avoidance hole 412, so that the electronic device can realize the image acquisition function through the avoidance hole 412 .

第二壳体420可以盖设于安装槽411的槽口,以对装配于安装槽411内的电子设备进行保护。在电子设备装配于安装槽411、且第二壳体420盖设于安装槽411的槽口时,触控组件430可以穿设于第二壳体420并可作用于电子设备的触控屏,进而通过触控组件430实现触控操作。The second housing 420 can cover the notch of the installation groove 411 to protect the electronic equipment assembled in the installation groove 411 . When the electronic device is assembled in the installation groove 411, and the second housing 420 is covered in the notch of the installation groove 411, the touch component 430 can pass through the second housing 420 and act on the touch screen of the electronic device, Furthermore, the touch operation is realized through the touch component 430 .

如图37所示,第二壳体420可以沿s1方向相对于第一壳体410进行相背运动,以使得电子设备系统40能够呈现出如图35所示的第一状态。第二壳体420还可以沿s2方向相对于第一壳体410进行相向运动,以使得电子设备系统40能够呈现出如图36所示的第二状态。As shown in FIG. 37 , the second housing 420 can move away from the first housing 410 along the direction s1 , so that the electronic device system 40 can assume the first state as shown in FIG. 35 . The second housing 420 can also move relative to the first housing 410 along the direction s2, so that the electronic device system 40 can assume the second state as shown in FIG. 36 .

在第一状态时,触控组件430位于第一壳体410背离电子设备的一侧,此时触控组件430不能够作用于电子设备,电子设备呈常规化使用模式。在第二状态时,触控组件430可以作用于电子设备的触控屏,进而可以通过触控组件430实现相应触控操作。In the first state, the touch component 430 is located on the side of the first housing 410 facing away from the electronic device. At this time, the touch component 430 cannot act on the electronic device, and the electronic device is in a normal use mode. In the second state, the touch component 430 can act on the touch screen of the electronic device, and then the corresponding touch operation can be realized through the touch component 430 .

在一应用场景中,以触控模组被配置为用于实现电子设备的拍摄功能为例。与传统相机相比,诸如手机类电子设备通过触控屏的触控操作实现拍摄功能通常缺乏握持感以及交互体验。具体体现为传统相机拍摄通常通过握持相机、并通过按钮、开关、滚动等控件控制拍摄元素,并通过实体按键对相关拍摄参数进行调整。而在使用诸如手机类电子设备进行拍摄时缺乏握持感,所有拍摄参数均需要通过触控屏进行交互,缺乏实体控件的触感。另外,在触控屏上进行交互时,触控操作通常会涉及多个步骤,例如,首先点击需要调整的参数(诸如快门速度等),然后进而二级操作界面,通过滑动等交互操作进行参数调整。In an application scenario, take a touch module configured to implement a photographing function of an electronic device as an example. Compared with traditional cameras, electronic devices such as mobile phones usually lack a sense of grip and an interactive experience when the shooting function is realized through the touch operation of the touch screen. The specific embodiment is that the traditional camera shooting usually controls the shooting elements by holding the camera, controlling the shooting elements through buttons, switches, scrolling and other controls, and adjusting the relevant shooting parameters through physical buttons. However, when shooting with electronic devices such as mobile phones, there is no sense of grip, and all shooting parameters need to be interacted through the touch screen, which lacks the touch of physical controls. In addition, when interacting on the touch screen, the touch operation usually involves multiple steps. For example, first click on the parameter (such as shutter speed, etc.) Adjustment.

基于此,通过将上述实施例中的触控模组应用于电子设备中实现其拍摄功能时,可以弥合电子设备和传统相机在拍摄体验上的差距。Based on this, when the touch module in the above embodiment is applied to the electronic device to realize its shooting function, the gap in shooting experience between the electronic device and the traditional camera can be bridged.

请参阅图38和图39,图38是本申请一些实施例中电子设备的触控屏拍摄功能界面示意图,图39是触控模组作用于触控屏实现拍摄功能的效果示意图。其中,在电子设备进入拍摄功能时,触控屏的显示界面可以切换至拍摄界面。如图38所示,在拍摄界面中,具有用于图像显示的视窗区820以及用于执行触控操作的操作区830。Please refer to FIG. 38 and FIG. 39. FIG. 38 is a schematic diagram of the interface of the touch screen shooting function of the electronic device in some embodiments of the present application, and FIG. 39 is a schematic diagram of the effect of the touch module acting on the touch screen to realize the shooting function. Wherein, when the electronic device enters the shooting function, the display interface of the touch screen can be switched to the shooting interface. As shown in FIG. 38 , in the shooting interface, there is a window area 820 for image display and an operation area 830 for performing touch operations.

触控模组200可以对应于操作区830设置以使得触控模组200上的触控组件可以执行相应的触控操作。The touch module 200 can be arranged corresponding to the operation area 830 so that the touch components on the touch module 200 can perform corresponding touch operations.

可以理解的,对于电子设备拍摄功能而言,其参数调节主要有涉及旋钮以及按键等操作。基于此,触控模组200上的触控组件主要为第一触控组件和第二触控组件。第一触控组件可以实现旋钮操作,可对应实现的拍摄参数调节功能主要有:变焦调节、白平衡调节、曝光参数调节、快门速度调节、感光度调节、拍照模式调节(人像模式、风景模式、夜景模式、慢动作模式、延时摄影模式等)、预设滤镜调节等电子设备摄影中具备档位属性的调节功能。第二触控组件可以实现按键操作,可对应实现的拍摄参数功能主要有:快门键、切换拍摄和拍照模式、切换前后置摄像头、闪光灯开关等电子设备摄影中具备按键属性的操作功能。It can be understood that for the shooting function of the electronic device, its parameter adjustment mainly involves operations such as knobs and buttons. Based on this, the touch components on the touch module 200 are mainly the first touch component and the second touch component. The first touch component can realize knob operation, and the shooting parameter adjustment functions that can be realized correspondingly mainly include: zoom adjustment, white balance adjustment, exposure parameter adjustment, shutter speed adjustment, sensitivity adjustment, camera mode adjustment (portrait mode, landscape mode, Night scene mode, slow motion mode, time-lapse photography mode, etc.), preset filter adjustment and other electronic equipment photography have the adjustment function of the gear attribute. The second touch component can realize button operation, and the shooting parameter functions that can be realized correspondingly mainly include: shutter button, switching shooting and photo mode, switching front and rear cameras, flash switch and other electronic equipment photography with button attribute operation functions.

当需要通过触控模组执行相应的触控操作(例如拍摄)时,首先需要唤醒电子设备的相应功能(例如拍摄功能)从而使得触控屏显示出相应的操作界面(例如拍摄界面)。可选地,可以通过电子设备中的霍尔传感器感应触控模组中的磁铁磁场,当触控模组与触控屏之间的距离处于预设范围之内时,则可以认为触控模组已经装配于电子设备上了,可以通过触控模组执行相应的触控操作。此时,霍尔传感器可以输出检测信号使得电子设备唤醒的相应功能并在触控屏上显示相应的操作界面。When it is necessary to perform a corresponding touch operation (such as shooting) through the touch module, it is first necessary to wake up the corresponding function of the electronic device (such as the shooting function) so that the touch screen displays a corresponding operation interface (such as the shooting interface). Optionally, the magnetic field in the touch module can be sensed by the Hall sensor in the electronic device. When the distance between the touch module and the touch screen is within a preset range, it can be considered that the touch module The group has been assembled on the electronic device, and the corresponding touch operation can be performed through the touch module. At this time, the Hall sensor can output a detection signal to wake up the corresponding function of the electronic device and display a corresponding operation interface on the touch screen.

当然,还可以通过其他传感器来检测触控模组的状态,例如重力传感器、压力传感器等。当触控模组装配于电子设备上时,触控模组对电子设备施加的作用力使得上传感器可以检测到,从而输出检测信号使得电子设备唤醒的相应功能并在触控屏上显示相应的操作界面。Of course, other sensors can also be used to detect the state of the touch module, such as a gravity sensor, a pressure sensor, and the like. When the touch module is assembled on the electronic device, the force exerted by the touch module on the electronic device can be detected by the upper sensor, thereby outputting a detection signal to wake up the corresponding function of the electronic device and display the corresponding function on the touch screen. Operation interface.

如图35至图37所示,当触控模组的装配件为电子设备的保护壳时。在需要通过触控模组执行拍摄功能时,可以将第二壳体盖设于安装槽411的槽口,从而使得触控组件430可以作用于电子设备的触控屏。As shown in FIG. 35 to FIG. 37 , when the assembly part of the touch module is a protective case of an electronic device. When it is necessary to perform the shooting function through the touch module, the second casing can be covered on the notch of the installation groove 411 , so that the touch component 430 can act on the touch screen of the electronic device.

进一步地,基于触控模组通常会遮盖触控屏上的操作界面,如何更好更快地实现触控模组与操作界面的匹配至关重要。Further, since the touch module usually covers the operation interface on the touch screen, how to achieve better and faster matching between the touch module and the operation interface is very important.

基于此,本申请实施例还提供了一种电子设备的控制方法,以实现触控模组与操作界面的快速匹配。Based on this, an embodiment of the present application also provides a control method for an electronic device, so as to realize quick matching between a touch module and an operation interface.

请参阅图40,图40是本申请一些实施例中电子设备的控制方法的流程示意图,该控制方法大致包括如下步骤:Please refer to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a schematic flowchart of a control method for an electronic device in some embodiments of the present application. The control method roughly includes the following steps:

S401、在触控屏上显示操作界面。其中,操作界面可以显示出需要执行控件操作的用户界面元素,并可以借此选取相适配的触控模组。S401. Display an operation interface on the touch screen. Wherein, the operation interface can display the user interface elements that need to perform control operations, and can select a suitable touch module by this.

S402、将触控模组装配于电子设备上,并对触控屏执行触控操作,以获取触控模组实际作用于触控屏的位置。S402. Assemble the touch module on the electronic device, and perform a touch operation on the touch screen, so as to obtain a position where the touch module actually acts on the touch screen.

其中,在将触控模组装配于电子设备上是,并不确定触控模组的触控端与需要操作的界面元素之间是否相匹配。此时,通过触控模组对触控屏执行触控操作可以获取到触控模组的触控端实际作用于触控屏的位置,以此可以跟显示的需要操作的界面元素进行比对,以判断触控模组的触控端与显示的操作界面是否匹配。Wherein, when the touch module is assembled on the electronic device, it is not sure whether the touch terminal of the touch module matches the interface elements to be operated. At this time, by performing touch operations on the touch screen through the touch module, the position where the touch terminal of the touch module actually acts on the touch screen can be obtained, so that it can be compared with the displayed interface elements that need to be operated. , to determine whether the touch terminal of the touch module matches the displayed operation interface.

S403、根据触控模组实际作用于触控屏的位置,将操作界面上对应的界面元素调整到触控模组实际作用于触控屏的位置。S403. According to the position where the touch module actually acts on the touch screen, adjust the corresponding interface elements on the operation interface to the position where the touch module actually acts on the touch screen.

可以理解的,当触控模组的触控端与显示的操作界面之间不相匹配时,可以通过调节操作界面上对应区域的界面元素,以使得二者相匹配。It can be understood that when the touch terminal of the touch module does not match the displayed operation interface, the interface elements in the corresponding area on the operation interface can be adjusted so that the two match.

上述应用场景主要介绍了触控模组弥补电子设备相较于传统相机在执行拍摄功能上的差异,即主要用于执行拍摄功能。而对于一些具有按键操作较多的触控模组而言,需要合理布局触控模组与电子设备的配合方式以实现特定的功能,例如与音乐相关的控件功能。可以理解的,基于音乐中音符的多样性,传统琴类产品通常具有几十甚至上百个琴键,而对于音乐爱好者以及学习者而言,传统琴类的价格太过昂贵。基于此,如何通过电子设备的触控操作实现类似于传统琴类的操作体验,成为了广大音乐爱好者以及学习者迫切需要解决的技术问题。The above application scenario mainly introduces that the touch module makes up for the difference between the electronic device and the traditional camera in performing the shooting function, that is, it is mainly used to perform the shooting function. For some touch modules with many button operations, it is necessary to rationally arrange the cooperation between the touch module and electronic equipment to realize specific functions, such as music-related control functions. Understandably, based on the diversity of notes in music, traditional piano products usually have dozens or even hundreds of keys, and for music lovers and learners, the price of traditional pianos is too expensive. Based on this, how to achieve an operating experience similar to that of a traditional piano through the touch operation of electronic devices has become a technical problem that music lovers and learners urgently need to solve.

电子设备系统60Electronic Equipment System 60

请参阅图41和图42,图41是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统60的结构示意图,图42是图41实施例中电子设备系统60的结构拆分示意图。其中,电子设备系统60可以包括电子设备800和触控模组400。其中,电子设备800可以为前述实施例中的电子设备,故此不再进行赘述。触控模组400可拆卸地装配于电子设备800上,且在触控模组400装配于电子设备上时,触控模组400可作用于触控屏810以实现诸如按压、旋转以及滑动等实体触控操作,进而提升用户的操作体验。Please refer to FIG. 41 and FIG. 42 , FIG. 41 is a schematic structural diagram of an electronic equipment system 60 in another embodiment of the present application, and FIG. 42 is a schematic diagram of a disassembled structure of the electronic equipment system 60 in the embodiment of FIG. 41 . Wherein, the electronic device system 60 may include an electronic device 800 and a touch module 400 . Wherein, the electronic device 800 may be the electronic device in the foregoing embodiments, so details are not repeated here. The touch module 400 is detachably assembled on the electronic device 800, and when the touch module 400 is assembled on the electronic device, the touch module 400 can act on the touch screen 810 to realize functions such as pressing, rotating and sliding. Entity touch operation, thereby improving the user's operating experience.

触控模组400Touch module 400

触控模组400可以包括装配支架410以及触控组件420。装配支架410被配置为用于将触控模组400定位装配于电子设备800上,触控组件420设于装配支架410背离电子设备800的一侧,并可通过装配支架410作用于电子设备800的触控屏810以实现触控操作。The touch module 400 may include an assembly bracket 410 and a touch component 420 . The assembly bracket 410 is configured to position and assemble the touch module 400 on the electronic device 800 , the touch component 420 is located on the side of the assembly bracket 410 away from the electronic device 800 , and can act on the electronic device 800 through the assembly bracket 410 The touch screen 810 is used to realize touch operation.

具体而言,装配支架410可以具有相背设置的第一侧和第二侧,第一侧用于与电子设备800装配以将触控模组400定位于电子设备800上,第二侧用于装配触控组件420,并可以使得触控组件420能够通过装配支架410作用于电子设备800的触控屏810以实现触控操作。换言之,电子设备800和触控组件420可以设于装配支架410的相背两侧,且装配支架410的第一侧为装配支架410与触控屏810相接触或者邻接的一侧,第二侧为装配支架410背离触控屏810的一侧。Specifically, the assembly bracket 410 may have a first side and a second side disposed opposite to each other, the first side is used for assembling with the electronic device 800 to position the touch module 400 on the electronic device 800, and the second side is used for The touch component 420 is assembled, and the touch component 420 can act on the touch screen 810 of the electronic device 800 through the assembly bracket 410 to realize touch operation. In other words, the electronic device 800 and the touch component 420 can be arranged on opposite sides of the assembly bracket 410, and the first side of the assembly bracket 410 is the side where the assembly bracket 410 contacts or adjoins the touch screen 810, and the second side It is for assembling the side of the bracket 410 away from the touch screen 810 .

触控组件420具有若干个,且若干个触控组件420可以均设于装配支架410的第二侧上。其中,每一触控组件420均可在外力作用下作用于触控屏810实现触控操作。由此,若干个触控组件420可形成类似于琴键的操作体验,使得电子设备800可以具有实体触觉反馈的钢琴体验。There are several touch components 420 , and the several touch components 420 may all be disposed on the second side of the assembly bracket 410 . Wherein, each touch component 420 can act on the touch screen 810 under the action of an external force to realize a touch operation. Thus, several touch components 420 can form an operation experience similar to that of a piano key, so that the electronic device 800 can have a piano experience with physical tactile feedback.

可以理解的,基于传统琴键一般存在大小不一的多种类型的琴键,故此若干个触控组件420的尺寸大小可以部分相同或者部分不同。It can be understood that there are various types of keys with different sizes based on traditional keys, so the sizes of the several touch components 420 may be partly the same or partly different.

进一步地,触控组件420可以包括设于装配支架410的第二侧上的安装件421、以及设于安装件421背离装配支架410的一侧的按键422。安装件421被配置为用于将触控组件420定位安装于装配支架410的第二侧上。按键422被配置为在外力作用下使得触控模组400可以作用于触控屏810以实现触控操作,并在外力撤销时取消上述作用。Further, the touch component 420 may include a mounting part 421 disposed on the second side of the mounting bracket 410 , and a button 422 disposed on a side of the mounting part 421 away from the mounting bracket 410 . The installation part 421 is configured to position and install the touch component 420 on the second side of the assembly bracket 410 . The button 422 is configured to enable the touch module 400 to act on the touch screen 810 to realize a touch operation under the action of an external force, and to cancel the above action when the external force is removed.

其中,安装件421可拆卸地装配于装配支架410的第二侧上。Wherein, the installation part 421 is detachably assembled on the second side of the assembly bracket 410 .

其中,按键422的一端可以与安装件421连接、另一端能够与安装件421对接或者分离,并在对接时按键422能够通过装配支架410作用于电子设备800的触控屏810以实现触控操作。换言之,按键422与安装件421连接的端部被配置为用于将按键422定位于安装件421上。按键422与安装件421对接或者分离的端部被配置为用于在外力作用时与安装件421实现的对接,并在外力撤销时实现与安装件421的分离。Wherein, one end of the key 422 can be connected to the mounting part 421, and the other end can be docked or separated from the mounting part 421, and when docked, the key 422 can act on the touch screen 810 of the electronic device 800 through the assembly bracket 410 to realize touch operation. . In other words, the end of the key 422 connected to the mounting part 421 is configured to position the key 422 on the mounting part 421 . The end of the button 422 that is docked with or separated from the mounting part 421 is configured to realize docking with the mounting part 421 when the external force acts, and realize separation from the mounting part 421 when the external force is removed.

参阅图43和图44,图43是本申请一些实施例中触控组件420的一状态示意图,图44是图43实施例中触控组件420的另一状态示意图。Referring to FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 , FIG. 43 is a schematic diagram of a state of the touch component 420 in some embodiments of the present application, and FIG. 44 is a schematic diagram of another state of the touch component 420 in the embodiment of FIG. 43 .

按键422可以具有相对设置的连接端422a以及按压端422b。连接端422a被配置为用于与安装件421连接。按压端422b可在外力作用下与安装件421对接,并在外力撤销时按压端422b与安装件421分离。The key 422 may have a connecting end 422a and a pressing end 422b oppositely disposed. The connection end 422a is configured for connection with the mount 421 . The pressing end 422b can be docked with the mounting part 421 under the action of external force, and the pressing end 422b is separated from the mounting part 421 when the external force is removed.

具体而言,按键422可以以连接端422a为支点相对于安装件421转动,进而使得按键422可以呈现出第一状态和第二状态。在第一状态时,按压端422b与安装件421分离(如图43所示)。在第二状态时,按压端422b与安装件421对接以作用于触控屏810(如图44所示)。Specifically, the button 422 can rotate relative to the installation part 421 with the connecting end 422a as a fulcrum, so that the button 422 can assume the first state and the second state. In the first state, the pressing end 422b is separated from the mounting part 421 (as shown in FIG. 43 ). In the second state, the pressing end 422b abuts with the mounting part 421 to act on the touch screen 810 (as shown in FIG. 44 ).

其中,按压端422b可在外力作用下朝向安装件421移动以使得按键422由第一状态切换至第二状态;在撤销外力时,按压端422b远离安装件421移动以使得按键422由第二状态切换至第一状态。Wherein, the pressing end 422b can move toward the mounting part 421 under the action of an external force so that the button 422 is switched from the first state to the second state; Switch to the first state.

进一步地,连接端422a和按压端422b分别凸设于按键422靠近安装件421的一侧,即按键422可以呈“凵”字形结构或者可以呈具有一端开口的盒状结构,盒状结构的开口朝向安装件421。Further, the connecting end 422a and the pressing end 422b are protrudingly provided on the side of the button 422 close to the mounting part 421, that is, the button 422 can be in the shape of a "凵" or a box-shaped structure with an opening at one end. The opening of the box-shaped structure Towards the mount 421 .

在一实施例中,安装件421可以为板状结构,并设于装配支架410的第二侧上。按键422设于安装件421背离装配支架410的一侧。在第一状态时,按键422相对于安装件421倾斜设置,即按键422的连接端422a连接于安装件421的一端,按压端422b与安装件421的另一相对端分离。在第二状态时,按压端422b与安装件421的另一相对端对接。In an embodiment, the mounting member 421 may be a plate-like structure and disposed on the second side of the assembly bracket 410 . The button 422 is disposed on a side of the mounting part 421 away from the mounting bracket 410 . In the first state, the button 422 is inclined relative to the installation part 421 , that is, the connection end 422 a of the button 422 is connected to one end of the installation part 421 , and the pressing end 422 b is separated from the opposite end of the installation part 421 . In the second state, the pressing end 422b abuts against the other opposite end of the mounting part 421 .

可选地,触控组件420还可以包括扭簧(图中未示出),该扭簧的一端连接于连接端422a、另一端连接于安装件421。在第一状态时,扭簧基于自身形态使得按压端422b与安装件421分离。按压端422b在外力作用下朝向安装件421移动以使得按键422由第一状态切换至第二状态时,扭簧发生形成产生作用力,该作用力可在上述外力撤销时使得按压端422b远离安装件421移动以使得按键422恢复至第一状态。Optionally, the touch component 420 may further include a torsion spring (not shown in the figure), one end of the torsion spring is connected to the connection end 422a, and the other end is connected to the mounting member 421 . In the first state, the torsion spring separates the pressing end 422b from the mounting part 421 based on its own shape. When the pressing end 422b moves toward the mounting part 421 under the action of an external force so that the key 422 is switched from the first state to the second state, the torsion spring generates a force, which can make the pressing end 422b away from the installation when the above-mentioned external force is cancelled. The member 421 moves so that the button 422 returns to the first state.

可选地,在按压端422b与安装件421的另一相对端对接时,按压端422b可以依次穿设于安装件421和装配支架410,并与触控屏810相抵触以实现触控操作。触控屏810可为电阻式或者电容式触控屏。当然,在其他实施例中,按压端422b靠近安装件421的一侧可以设有凸起结构,该凸起结构在按压端422b与安装件421对接时可以依次穿设于安装件421和装配支架410,并与触控屏810相抵触以实现触控操作。Optionally, when the pressing end 422b is docked with the other opposite end of the mounting part 421, the pressing end 422b can pass through the mounting part 421 and the mounting bracket 410 in turn, and conflict with the touch screen 810 to realize touch operation. The touch screen 810 can be a resistive or capacitive touch screen. Of course, in other embodiments, the side of the pressing end 422b close to the mounting part 421 can be provided with a protruding structure, and the protruding structure can be sequentially passed through the mounting part 421 and the mounting bracket when the pressing end 422b is docked with the mounting part 421 410, and conflict with the touch screen 810 to realize the touch operation.

请参阅图45至图47,图45是本申请一些实施例中触控组件420的结构拆分示意图,图46是图45实施例中按键422的结构示意图,图47是图45实施例中安装件421的结构示意图。Please refer to FIG. 45 to FIG. 47. FIG. 45 is a schematic diagram of the structure disassembly of the touch component 420 in some embodiments of the present application. FIG. 46 is a schematic structural diagram of the button 422 in the embodiment of FIG. Schematic diagram of the structure of piece 421.

触控组件420还可以包括相对设置的第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b、以及相对设置的第三磁性件420c和第四磁性件420d。其中,第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b可分别设有至少一个,且分别一一对应设置。第三磁性件420c和第四磁性件420d可分别设有至少一个,且分别一一对应设置。进一步地,第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b中的一者设于连接端422a上、另一者设于安装件421上,第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b之间具有磁性吸力,以使得连接端422a可以通过第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b之间的磁性吸力定位于安装件421上。第三磁性件420c和第四磁性件420d中的一者设于按压端422b上、另一者设于安装件421上,第三磁性件420c和第四磁性件420d之间具有磁性斥力,以使得按压端422b和安装件421可以通过第三磁性件420c和第四磁性件420d之间的磁性斥力实现分离。The touch assembly 420 may further include a first magnetic member 420a and a second magnetic member 420b oppositely disposed, and a third magnetic member 420c and a fourth magnetic member 420d oppositely disposed. Wherein, at least one of the first magnetic member 420a and the second magnetic member 420b can be provided respectively, and they are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. At least one of the third magnetic member 420c and the fourth magnetic member 420d can be provided respectively, and they are provided in a one-to-one correspondence. Further, one of the first magnetic part 420a and the second magnetic part 420b is provided on the connecting end 422a, and the other is provided on the mounting part 421, and there is a magnetic connection between the first magnetic part 420a and the second magnetic part 420b. suction force, so that the connecting end 422a can be positioned on the mounting part 421 through the magnetic attraction force between the first magnetic part 420a and the second magnetic part 420b. One of the third magnetic part 420c and the fourth magnetic part 420d is arranged on the pressing end 422b, and the other is arranged on the mounting part 421, and there is a magnetic repulsion between the third magnetic part 420c and the fourth magnetic part 420d, so as to The pressing end 422b and the installation part 421 can be separated by the magnetic repulsion between the third magnetic part 420c and the fourth magnetic part 420d.

可以理解的,第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b的数量、以及第三磁性件420c和第四磁性件420d的数量可以根据需要灵活设置。It can be understood that the number of the first magnetic member 420a and the second magnetic member 420b, and the number of the third magnetic member 420c and the fourth magnetic member 420d can be flexibly set according to needs.

可选地,第三磁性件420c和第四磁性件420d之间的磁性斥力大于第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b之间的磁性吸力,以在第一状态时使得按压端422b与安装件421分离。同时在对按压端422b施力进行按压时,在磁性斥力的作用下可以具有很明显的按压触觉反馈。Optionally, the magnetic repulsion force between the third magnetic piece 420c and the fourth magnetic piece 420d is greater than the magnetic attraction force between the first magnetic piece 420a and the second magnetic piece 420b, so that the pressing end 422b is in contact with the installation in the first state. Item 421 is detached. At the same time, when pressing the pressing end 422b with a force, there can be obvious pressing tactile feedback under the action of the magnetic repulsion force.

可以理解的,当上述磁性斥力过小时,可能难以克服按键422本身的重力以及上述磁性吸力。It can be understood that when the above-mentioned magnetic repulsion force is too small, it may be difficult to overcome the gravity of the button 422 itself and the above-mentioned magnetic attraction force.

在一实施例中,按压端422b具有第一导电部422c,该第一导电部422c在按压端422b与安装件421对接或者分离的方向上贯穿按压端422b。在按压端422b与安装件421对接时,第一导电部422c依次穿设于安装件421和装配支架410,并与触控屏810相接触以实现触控操作。此时,触控屏810可为电容式触控屏。可选地,第一导电部422c背离安装件421的表面可以与按压端422b背离安装件421的表面共面设置。In one embodiment, the pressing end 422b has a first conductive portion 422c , and the first conductive portion 422c penetrates through the pressing end 422b in a direction of abutting or separating the pressing end 422b from the mounting part 421 . When the pressing end 422b is docked with the mounting part 421 , the first conductive part 422c passes through the mounting part 421 and the mounting bracket 410 in turn, and contacts the touch screen 810 to realize touch operation. In this case, the touch screen 810 may be a capacitive touch screen. Optionally, the surface of the first conductive portion 422c facing away from the mounting part 421 may be coplanar with the surface of the pressing end 422b facing away from the mounting part 421 .

在一实施例中,安装件421可为槽状结构,即安装件421背离装配支架410的一侧设有槽421a,按键422嵌设于槽421a中。可选地,按键422可为槽状结构,槽状结构的相对两侧壁分别作为按键422的连接端422a和按压端422b。连接端422a嵌设于槽421a中,并可通过扭簧或者磁性件定位安装于槽421a的一端。按压端422b嵌设于槽421a中,并对应于槽421a的另一相对端设置。In one embodiment, the mounting part 421 may be a groove-shaped structure, that is, a groove 421 a is formed on a side of the mounting part 421 away from the assembly bracket 410 , and the button 422 is embedded in the groove 421 a. Optionally, the button 422 may be a groove-shaped structure, and opposite side walls of the groove-shaped structure serve as the connecting end 422a and the pressing end 422b of the button 422 respectively. The connecting end 422a is embedded in the slot 421a, and can be positioned and installed on one end of the slot 421a by a torsion spring or a magnetic piece. The pressing end 422b is embedded in the slot 421a and is disposed corresponding to the other opposite end of the slot 421a.

如前述,连接端422a和按压端422b分别凸设于按键422靠近安装件421的一侧,即按键422可以包括按键主体422c、以及设于按键主体422c靠近安装件421的一侧的连接端422a和按压端422b。此时,按键422大致呈前述的“凵”字形结构。当然,在一些实施例中,按键422可为前述的一端开口的盒状或者槽状结构,此时,按键组件422c可以为其槽底壁,连接端422a和按压端422b可以为其相对设置的两槽侧壁。As mentioned above, the connecting end 422a and the pressing end 422b are protrudingly provided on the side of the key 422 close to the mounting part 421, that is, the key 422 may include a key body 422c and a connecting end 422a provided on the side of the key body 422c close to the mounting part 421 and the pressing end 422b. At this time, the button 422 is roughly in the shape of the aforementioned "凵" character. Of course, in some embodiments, the button 422 can be the aforementioned box-shaped or groove-shaped structure with one end open. At this time, the button assembly 422c can be the bottom wall of the groove, and the connecting end 422a and the pressing end 422b can be oppositely arranged. Two groove side walls.

当按压端422b可以依次穿设于安装件421和装配支架410,并能够与触控屏810相抵触时,按压端422b凸出按键主体422c的高度大于连接端422a凸出按键主体422c的高度,以在按压端422b与安装件421对接时,按压端422b可以部分依次穿设于安装件421和装配支架410,并能够与触控屏810相抵触以实现触控操作。此时,触控屏810可为电阻式触控屏。当然,按压端422b凸出按键主体422c的高度和连接端422a凸出按键主体422c的高度之间可以不作具体限制,即可以相同或者不同,此时可通过在按压端422b背离按键主体422c的端部设置凸起结构。在按压端422b与安装件421对接时,按压端422b上的凸起结构可以依次穿设于安装件421和装配支架410,并能够与触控屏810相抵触。When the pressing end 422b can pass through the mounting member 421 and the assembly bracket 410 in turn, and can be in contact with the touch screen 810, the height of the pressing end 422b protruding from the key body 422c is greater than the height of the connecting end 422a protruding from the key body 422c, When the pressing end 422b is docked with the mounting part 421 , the pressing end 422b can partly pass through the mounting part 421 and the mounting bracket 410 in sequence, and can be in contact with the touch screen 810 to realize touch operation. In this case, the touch screen 810 may be a resistive touch screen. Of course, the height of the pressing end 422b protruding from the key body 422c and the height of the connecting end 422a protruding from the key body 422c may not be specifically limited, that is, they may be the same or different. A raised structure is provided on the inside. When the pressing end 422 b is docked with the mounting part 421 , the protruding structure on the pressing end 422 b can pass through the mounting part 421 and the mounting bracket 410 in turn, and can be in contact with the touch screen 810 .

当按压端422b凸出按键主体422c的高度与连接端422a凸出按键主体422c的高度基本一致时,穿设于按压端422b的第一导电部422c可以在按压端422b背离按键主体422c的一侧凸出于按压端422b设置,且该第一导电部422c可以在按压端422b背离安装件421的一侧外露于按键主体422c。在按压端422b与安装件421对接时,第一导电部422c可以依次穿设于安装件421和装配支架410,并能够与触控屏810相抵触。此时,触控屏810可为电阻式触控屏或者电容式触控屏。When the height of the pressing end 422b protruding from the key body 422c is basically the same as the height of the connecting end 422a protruding from the key body 422c, the first conductive part 422c pierced through the pressing end 422b can be on the side of the pressing end 422b away from the key body 422c. The first conductive portion 422c is protruded from the pressing end 422b, and the first conductive portion 422c may be exposed to the key body 422c on the side of the pressing end 422b away from the installation part 421 . When the pressing end 422 b is docked with the mounting part 421 , the first conductive part 422 c can pass through the mounting part 421 and the mounting bracket 410 in turn, and can be in contact with the touch screen 810 . At this time, the touch screen 810 may be a resistive touch screen or a capacitive touch screen.

请参阅图48和图49,图48是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件420的结构拆分示意图,图49是图48实施例中安装件421的结构示意图。Please refer to FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 , FIG. 48 is a schematic diagram of a disassembled structure of a touch component 420 in another embodiment of the present application, and FIG. 49 is a schematic structural diagram of a mounting part 421 in the embodiment of FIG. 48 .

其中,穿设于按压端422b的第一导电部422c可以在按压端422b靠近安装件421的一侧凸出于按压端422b设置,且该第一导电部422c可以在按压端422b背离安装件421的一侧外露于按键422。Wherein, the first conductive part 422c pierced through the pressing end 422b can protrude from the pressing end 422b on the side of the pressing end 422b close to the mounting part 421, and the first conductive part 422c can be away from the mounting part 421 at the pressing end 422b One side of is exposed to the button 422 .

进一步地,安装件421上设有第二导电部421b,在按压端422b与安装件421对接时,第二导电部421b与第一导电部422c相接。此时,可以通过第二导电部421b作用于触控屏810上以实现触控操作。Further, the mounting part 421 is provided with a second conductive part 421b, and when the pressing end 422b is docked with the mounting part 421, the second conductive part 421b is in contact with the first conductive part 422c. At this time, the second conductive part 421b can act on the touch screen 810 to realize the touch operation.

结合参阅图50,图50是本申请一些实施例中装配支架410的结构示意图,该装配支架410上设有第三导电部410c。Referring to FIG. 50 in conjunction, FIG. 50 is a schematic structural diagram of an assembly bracket 410 in some embodiments of the present application, and the assembly bracket 410 is provided with a third conductive portion 410c.

当触控模组400与电子设备800装配时,第三导电部410c的一端与触控屏810相接触、另一端与安装件421上的第二导电部421b相接触。此时,在用户手指或者其他导体接触第一导电部422c并对按压端422b施加作用力使得按压端422b与安装件421对接时,第一导电部422c与第二导电部421b相接触,从而实现触控操作。其中,第三导电部410c在装配支架410与触控屏810的堆叠方向上穿设于装配支架410,以使得第三导电部410c能够分别与触控屏810、第二导电部421b相接触。When the touch module 400 is assembled with the electronic device 800 , one end of the third conductive portion 410 c is in contact with the touch screen 810 , and the other end is in contact with the second conductive portion 421 b on the mounting part 421 . At this time, when the user's fingers or other conductors contact the first conductive part 422c and apply force to the pressing end 422b so that the pressing end 422b is docked with the mounting part 421, the first conductive part 422c is in contact with the second conductive part 421b, thereby realizing Touch operation. Wherein, the third conductive portion 410c penetrates the assembly bracket 410 in the stacking direction of the assembly bracket 410 and the touch screen 810 , so that the third conductive portion 410c can contact the touch screen 810 and the second conductive portion 421b respectively.

其中,触控屏810可为电容式触控屏。Wherein, the touch screen 810 may be a capacitive touch screen.

其中,触控模组400具有若干个,则第一导电部422c、第二导电部421b以及第三导电部410c分别具有若干个,且分别一一对应设置。Where there are several touch modules 400 , there are several first conductive parts 422 c , second conductive parts 421 b , and third conductive parts 410 c respectively, and they are set in one-to-one correspondence.

如前述,安装件421装配于装配支架410的第二侧上,以将触控组件420定位装配于装配支架410的第二侧上。其中,安装件421可通过粘接、螺接、卡接、磁吸等连接方式实现与装配支架410的可拆卸装配。As mentioned above, the installation part 421 is assembled on the second side of the assembly bracket 410 to position and assemble the touch component 420 on the second side of the assembly bracket 410 . Wherein, the mounting part 421 can be detachably assembled with the assembly bracket 410 through bonding, screwing, clipping, magnetic attraction and other connection methods.

在一实施例中,安装件421通过磁吸的连接方式实现与装配支架410的可拆卸装配。具体而言,第二导电部421b和第三导电部410c中的一者为磁体、另一者为磁性件,第二导电部421b和第三导电部410c相互吸引以将安装件421定位装配于装配支架410上。In one embodiment, the mounting part 421 is detachably assembled with the mounting bracket 410 through a magnetic connection. Specifically, one of the second conductive portion 421b and the third conductive portion 410c is a magnet, and the other is a magnetic member, and the second conductive portion 421b and the third conductive portion 410c attract each other to position and assemble the mounting part 421 on the Assembly bracket 410.

如前述,第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b中的一者设于连接端422a上、另一者设于安装件421上,第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b之间具有磁性吸力,以使得连接端422a可以通过第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b之间的磁性吸力定位于安装件421上。As mentioned above, one of the first magnetic piece 420a and the second magnetic piece 420b is set on the connection end 422a, and the other is set on the mounting piece 421, and there is a magnetic connection between the first magnetic piece 420a and the second magnetic piece 420b. suction force, so that the connecting end 422a can be positioned on the mounting part 421 through the magnetic attraction force between the first magnetic part 420a and the second magnetic part 420b.

基于此,以第一磁性件420a设于安装件421上为例,装配支架410上设有与第一磁性件420a相对应的连接件410a。其中,连接件410a可为磁体,以与第一磁性件420a相互吸引,进而将安装件421定位装配于装配支架410上。当然,在其他实施方式中,连接件410a可为可为磁体或者磁吸件,第一磁性件420a可为磁体,只要保证第一磁性件420a和连接件410a之间具有磁性吸引力即可。Based on this, taking the first magnetic part 420a disposed on the mounting part 421 as an example, the mounting bracket 410 is provided with a connecting part 410a corresponding to the first magnetic part 420a. Wherein, the connecting part 410 a can be a magnet, so as to attract each other with the first magnetic part 420 a, and then position and assemble the mounting part 421 on the assembly bracket 410 . Of course, in other implementations, the connecting piece 410a can be a magnet or a magnetic attraction piece, and the first magnetic piece 420a can be a magnet, as long as there is a magnetic attraction force between the first magnetic piece 420a and the connecting piece 410a.

在一实施例中,当连接端422a和安装件421通过扭簧连接时,设于安装件421上的第一磁性件420a和设于装配支架410上的连接件410a相吸以将安装件421定位装配于装配支架410上。In one embodiment, when the connecting end 422a and the mounting part 421 are connected by a torsion spring, the first magnetic part 420a provided on the mounting part 421 and the connecting part 410a provided on the assembly bracket 410 are attracted to each other so that the mounting part 421 The positioning is assembled on the assembly bracket 410 .

在一实施例中,当连接端422a和安装件421通过第一磁性件420a和第二磁性件420b之间的磁吸力吸附连接时,第一磁性件420a进一步和连接件410a相吸以将安装件421定位装配于装配支架410上。即第二磁性件420b和连接件410a可分别吸附于第一磁性件420a的相对两端。In one embodiment, when the connection end 422a and the installation part 421 are connected through the magnetic attraction force between the first magnetic part 420a and the second magnetic part 420b, the first magnetic part 420a is further attracted to the connection part 410a to make the installation The component 421 is positioned and assembled on the assembly bracket 410 . That is, the second magnetic part 420b and the connecting part 410a can be respectively attracted to opposite ends of the first magnetic part 420a.

可以理解的,通过上述结构设置将安装件421的相对两端分别与装配支架410装配连接,可以保证触控组件420装配的稳定性。It can be understood that the assembly and connection of the opposite ends of the installation part 421 with the assembly bracket 410 through the above structural arrangement can ensure the stability of the assembly of the touch assembly 420 .

在一实施例中,装配支架410的第一侧上可具有相对设置的第一夹持部410b和第二夹持部410d,第一夹持部410b和第二夹持部410d相配合以用于夹持电子设备800,从而将触控模组400定位于电子设备800上。具体而言,第一夹持部410b和第二夹持部410d设于装配支架410背离触控组件420的一侧,并可用于夹持电子设备800的相对两端。In one embodiment, the first side of the assembly bracket 410 may have a first clamping portion 410b and a second clamping portion 410d oppositely disposed, and the first clamping portion 410b and the second clamping portion 410d cooperate to be used For clamping the electronic device 800 , the touch module 400 is positioned on the electronic device 800 . Specifically, the first clamping portion 410 b and the second clamping portion 410 d are disposed on a side of the mounting bracket 410 away from the touch component 420 , and can be used to clamp opposite ends of the electronic device 800 .

再次参阅图41,图41中示出了X、Y、Z三个方向以便于下文进行相应描述,其中,X方向可以为电子设备800的较长边的延伸方向,Y方向可以为电子设备800的较短边的延伸方向,Z方向可以为电子设备800的厚度方向。可以理解的,上述较长边和较短边只是相对而言,在一些场景中可以进行切换。XY平面大致平行于触控屏810的显示面,或者XY平面大致限定出触控屏810的显示面。Z方向大体上正交于XY平面。可选地,Y方向可以与X方向相交,Z方向可以与XY平面相交。优选地,X、Y、Z三个方向两两垂直。其中,第一夹持部410b和第二夹持部410d可以夹持于电子设备800在X方向上相对设置的两端上,也可以夹持于电子设备800在Y方向上相对设置的两端上。Referring to FIG. 41 again, three directions X, Y, and Z are shown in FIG. 41 to facilitate corresponding description below, wherein, the X direction may be the extension direction of the longer side of the electronic device 800, and the Y direction may be the extension direction of the longer side of the electronic device 800. The extension direction of the shorter side of the Z direction may be the thickness direction of the electronic device 800 . It can be understood that the aforementioned longer side and shorter side are only relative terms, and can be switched in some scenarios. The XY plane is roughly parallel to the display surface of the touch screen 810 , or the XY plane roughly defines the display surface of the touch screen 810 . The Z direction is substantially orthogonal to the XY plane. Optionally, the Y direction may intersect the X direction, and the Z direction may intersect the XY plane. Preferably, the three directions of X, Y and Z are perpendicular to each other. Wherein, the first clamping part 410b and the second clamping part 410d can be clamped on the opposite ends of the electronic device 800 in the X direction, or can be clamped on the opposite ends of the electronic device 800 in the Y direction. superior.

装配支架410具有相对设置的第一边沿411和第二边沿412,第一夹持部410b和第二夹持部410d设于第一边沿411和第二边沿412之间。其中,第一边沿411和第二边沿412可以沿X方向延伸设置,也可以沿Y方向延伸设置,本领域技术人员可以根据实际需要灵活设置。The assembly bracket 410 has a first edge 411 and a second edge 412 oppositely disposed, and the first clamping portion 410 b and the second clamping portion 410 d are disposed between the first edge 411 and the second edge 412 . Wherein, the first edge 411 and the second edge 412 may be extended along the X direction, or may be extended along the Y direction, and those skilled in the art may flexibly set them according to actual needs.

例如,第一夹持部410b和第二夹持部410d可以夹持于电子设备800在第一方向上相对设置的两端上,第一边沿411和第二边沿412可以为装配支架410在第一方向上延伸的边沿,第一边沿411和第二边沿412在第二方向上相对设置,第一方向和第二方向相交。For example, the first clamping part 410b and the second clamping part 410d can be clamped on opposite ends of the electronic device 800 in the first direction, and the first edge 411 and the second edge 412 can be the assembly bracket 410 The edges extending in one direction, the first edge 411 and the second edge 412 are oppositely arranged in the second direction, and the first direction and the second direction intersect.

其中,第一方向和第二方向中的一者为X方向、另一者为Y方向。Wherein, one of the first direction and the second direction is the X direction, and the other is the Y direction.

在触控模组400装配于电子设备800上时,第一边沿411相较于第二边沿412远离触控屏810的中心区域。换言之,第一边沿411与触控屏810中心之间的间距大于第二边沿412与触控屏810中心之间的间距。When the touch module 400 is assembled on the electronic device 800 , the first edge 411 is farther away from the central area of the touch screen 810 than the second edge 412 . In other words, the distance between the first edge 411 and the center of the touch screen 810 is greater than the distance between the second edge 412 and the center of the touch screen 810 .

可以理解的,通过上述结构设置,第一边沿411相较于第二边沿412更为靠近电子设备800的外部。此时,按键422的按压端422b邻近于第一边沿411设置、连接端422a邻近于第二边沿412设置,以便于用户执行相应的触控操作。具体而言,按键422位于第一边沿411和第二边沿412之间,即按键主体422c位于第一边沿411和第二边沿412之间。按压端422b位于按键主体422c靠近第一边沿411的端部,连接端422a位于按键主体422c靠近第二边沿412的端部,It can be understood that, through the above structural arrangement, the first edge 411 is closer to the outside of the electronic device 800 than the second edge 412 . At this time, the pressing end 422b of the button 422 is disposed adjacent to the first edge 411 , and the connecting end 422a is disposed adjacent to the second edge 412 , so as to facilitate the user to perform a corresponding touch operation. Specifically, the key 422 is located between the first edge 411 and the second edge 412 , that is, the key body 422c is located between the first edge 411 and the second edge 412 . The pressing end 422b is located at the end of the key body 422c close to the first edge 411, and the connecting end 422a is located at the end of the key body 422c close to the second edge 412,

请参阅图51,图51是本申请一些实施例中触控组件420的部分结构拆分示意图。其中,若干个触控组件420的尺寸大小可以部分相同或者部分不同,以满足不同类型的琴键需求。可以理解的,参考琴键的设置方式,若干个触控组件420可以在第一方向上并排设置。Please refer to FIG. 51 . FIG. 51 is a schematic exploded view of a partial structure of the touch component 420 in some embodiments of the present application. Wherein, the sizes of the several touch components 420 may be partly the same or partly different, so as to meet the requirements of different types of keys. It can be understood that, with reference to the arrangement of the keys, several touch components 420 can be arranged side by side in the first direction.

具体而言,触控组件420可以包括在第一方向上并排设置的第一触控组件4201和第二触控组件4202。其中,第一触控组件4201的按压端422b与第一边沿411之间的间距小于第二触控组件4202的按压端422b与第一边沿411之间的间距。第一触控组件4201的连接端422a与第二边沿412之间的间距和第二触控组件4202的连接端422a与第二边沿412之间的间距大体上一致。至少部分相邻两个第一触控组件4201之间形成有用于容置第二触控组件4202的避让空间4203。Specifically, the touch component 420 may include a first touch component 4201 and a second touch component 4202 arranged side by side in a first direction. Wherein, the distance between the pressing end 422b of the first touch component 4201 and the first edge 411 is smaller than the distance between the pressing end 422b of the second touch component 4202 and the first edge 411 . The distance between the connection end 422a of the first touch component 4201 and the second edge 412 is substantially the same as the distance between the connection end 422a of the second touch component 4202 and the second edge 412 . An avoidance space 4203 for accommodating the second touch component 4202 is formed at least partially between two adjacent first touch components 4201 .

可以理解的,第一触控组件4201可以类似于琴键上较大的白色琴键,第二触控组件4202可以类似于琴键上较小的黑色琴键。It can be understood that the first touch component 4201 may be similar to a larger white key on a piano, and the second touch component 4202 may be similar to a smaller black key on a piano.

对于不同位置的第一触控组件4201而言,相邻两个第一触控组件4201的两个连接端422a之间形成避让空间4203方式稍有差异。For the first touch components 4201 at different positions, the way of forming the escape space 4203 between the two connecting ends 422a of two adjacent first touch components 4201 is slightly different.

例如,对于在第一方向上依次排列的三个第一触控组件4201a、4201b、4201c而言,第一触控组件4201b位于第一触控组件4201a和第一触控组件4201c之间。此时,第一触控组件4201a和第一触控组件4201b之间形成有一避让空间4203,第一触控组件4201b和第一触控组件4201c之间形成有另一避让空间4203。For example, for the three first touch components 4201a, 4201b, 4201c arranged sequentially in the first direction, the first touch component 4201b is located between the first touch component 4201a and the first touch component 4201c. At this time, a avoidance space 4203 is formed between the first touch component 4201a and the first touch component 4201b, and another avoidance space 4203 is formed between the first touch component 4201b and the first touch component 4201c.

具体地,第一触控组件4201a靠近第一触控组件4201b的一侧形成有第一避让部,第一触控组件4201b靠近第一触控组件4201a的一侧形成有第二避让部,第一触控组件4201b靠近第一触控组件4201c的一侧形成有第三避让部,第一触控组件4201c靠近第一触控组件4201b的一侧形成有第四避让部。其中,第一避让部和第二避让部配合形成一避让空间4203,第三避让部和第四避让部配合形成另一避让空间4203。Specifically, a first escape portion is formed on the side of the first touch component 4201a close to the first touch component 4201b, and a second avoidance portion is formed on the side of the first touch component 4201b close to the first touch component 4201a. A third escape portion is formed on a side of a touch component 4201b close to the first touch component 4201c, and a fourth escape portion is formed on a side of the first touch component 4201c close to the first touch component 4201b. Wherein, the first evacuation part cooperates with the second evacuation part to form a evacuation space 4203 , and the third evacuation part cooperates with the fourth evacuation part to form another evacuation space 4203 .

请参阅图52,图52是本申请另一些实施例中触控组件420的部分结构示意图。其中,第一触控组件4201具有在第一方向上依次排列的四个第一触控组件4201e、4201f、4201g、4201h。此时,相邻的第一触控组件4201e和第一触控组件4201f之间形成有一避让空间4203。相邻的第一触控组件4201g和第一触控组件4201h之间形成有另一避让空间4203。相邻的第一触控组件4201f和第一触控组件4201g之间不具有用于容置第二触控组件4202的避让空间4203。Please refer to FIG. 52 . FIG. 52 is a partial structural diagram of a touch component 420 in another embodiment of the present application. Wherein, the first touch component 4201 has four first touch components 4201e, 4201f, 4201g, 4201h arranged sequentially in the first direction. At this time, an escape space 4203 is formed between the adjacent first touch components 4201e and the first touch components 4201f. Another escape space 4203 is formed between adjacent first touch components 4201g and first touch components 4201h. There is no escape space 4203 for accommodating the second touch component 4202 between the adjacent first touch component 4201f and the first touch component 4201g.

当然,在其他实施方式中,若干个触控组件420和第一边沿411/第二边沿412之间的间距可以在第一方向上呈递减或者递增的趋势排布。或者,若干个触控组件420在第一方向上并排设置,且在排列方向上位于中间的触控组件420与第一边沿411/第二边沿412之间的间距最大或最小,位于中间触控组件420两侧的触控组件420和第一边沿411/第二边沿412之间的间距可分别在第一方向上呈递减或者递增的趋势排布。Certainly, in other implementation manners, the distance between the several touch components 420 and the first edge 411 /the second edge 412 may be arranged in a decreasing or increasing trend in the first direction. Alternatively, several touch components 420 are arranged side by side in the first direction, and the distance between the touch component 420 in the middle and the first edge 411/second edge 412 in the arrangement direction is the largest or the smallest, and the touch control component 420 in the middle The spacing between the touch component 420 and the first edge 411 /the second edge 412 on both sides of the component 420 can be arranged in a decreasing or increasing trend in the first direction, respectively.

可以理解的,上述实施例仅示例性地列举了触控组件420的排布方式,但不限于此,本领域技术人员依据本申请的启示直接得出的其他排布方式均应理解为在本申请的保护范围之内。It can be understood that the above-mentioned embodiment only exemplifies the arrangement of the touch components 420, but is not limited thereto. Other arrangements directly obtained by those skilled in the art based on the teachings of the present application should be understood as included in this document. within the scope of the application.

本申请实施例提供的触控模组以及电子设备系统,通过设置具有多个触控组件的触控模组,并可以将该触控模组与电子设备配合使用以为钢琴业余爱好者或者尝鲜者提供了具备实体触觉反馈的钢琴学习体验,且提高了现有的触控屏电子化的钢琴体验的真实感。本申请触控模组采用无源空间的设计思路,即无需电池、电路等,使得触控模组整体结构结构较为简单、成本较低,且可通过低成本实现定制化的用户体验。The touch module and the electronic equipment system provided by the embodiment of the present application can provide a touch module with a plurality of touch components, and the touch module can be used in conjunction with the electronic equipment for piano amateurs or early adopters. Provides a piano learning experience with physical tactile feedback, and improves the realism of the existing electronic piano experience with a touch screen. The touch module of this application adopts the design concept of passive space, that is, no battery, circuit, etc. are required, so that the overall structure of the touch module is relatively simple, the cost is low, and a customized user experience can be realized at low cost.

另外,基于可穿戴设备的发展,可穿戴设备主流的产品形态包括以手腕为支撑的watch类(包括手表和表带等产品),以脚为支撑的shoes类(包括鞋、袜子或者将来的其他腿上佩戴产品),以头部为支撑的Glass类(包括眼镜、头盔、佩戴件等),以及智能服装、书包、拐杖、配饰等各类非主流产品形态。其中,头戴式设备是佩戴在用户头部的一种可穿戴设备,通过在头戴式设备的显示屏中,与佩戴用户左眼和右眼对应的区域显示相应的内容,从而可以使用户体验到虚拟现实(Virtual Reality,VR)和增强现实(Augmented Reality,AR)的显示效果。In addition, based on the development of wearable devices, the mainstream product forms of wearable devices include wrist-supported watches (including watches and straps, etc.), feet-supported shoes (including shoes, socks or other products in the future) Leg-wearing products), head-supported Glass (including glasses, helmets, wearables, etc.), and various non-mainstream product forms such as smart clothing, school bags, crutches, and accessories. Wherein, the head-mounted device is a kind of wearable device worn on the head of the user. By displaying corresponding content on the display screen of the head-mounted device corresponding to the left and right eyes of the user, the user can Experience the display effects of virtual reality (Virtual Reality, VR) and augmented reality (Augmented Reality, AR).

在AR眼镜的示例中,可穿戴设备可被配置成信号连接将数据传递到外部处理设备并从外部处理设备接收数据,信号连接可以是有线连接、无线连接或其组合。然而,在其他情形中,可穿戴设备可用作独立设备,即在可穿戴设备自身进行数据处理。信号连接可以被配置成承载任何种类的数据,诸如图像数据(例如,静止图像和/或完全运动视频,包括2D和3D图像)、音频、多媒体、语音和/或任何其他类型的数据。In the example of AR glasses, the wearable device may be configured to transmit data to and receive data from an external processing device through a signal connection, the signal connection may be a wired connection, a wireless connection or a combination thereof. However, in other cases, the wearable device can be used as a stand-alone device, ie data processing is performed on the wearable device itself. Signal connections may be configured to carry any kind of data, such as image data (eg, still images and/or full motion video, including 2D and 3D images), audio, multimedia, voice, and/or any other type of data.

外部处理设备可以是例如游戏控制台、个人计算机、平板计算机、智能电话或其他类型的处理设备。信号连接可以是例如通用串行总线(USB)连接、Wi-Fi连接、蓝牙或蓝牙低能量(BLE)连接、以太网连接、电缆连接、DSL连接、蜂窝连接(例如,3G、LTE/4G或5G)等或其组合。The external processing device may be, for example, a game console, personal computer, tablet computer, smartphone, or other type of processing device. The signal connection may be, for example, a Universal Serial Bus (USB) connection, a Wi-Fi connection, a Bluetooth or Bluetooth Low Energy (BLE) connection, an Ethernet connection, a cable connection, a DSL connection, a cellular connection (e.g., 3G, LTE/4G or 5G), etc. or a combination thereof.

附加地,外部处理设备可以经由网络与一个或多个其他外部处理设备通信,网络可以是或包括例如局域网(LAN)、广域网(WAN)、内联网、城域网(MAN)、全球因特网或其组合。Additionally, the external processing device may communicate with one or more other external processing devices via a network, which may be or include, for example, a local area network (LAN), a wide area network (WAN), an intranet, a metropolitan area network (MAN), the global Internet, or combination.

其中,在AR眼镜的示例中,显示屏被设计成,例如,通过将光投影到用户眼睛中,在用户对其现实世界环境的视图上覆盖图像。可穿戴设备还可包括环境光传感器,并且还可包括电子电路系统以控制上述部件中的至少一些并且执行相关联的数据处理功能。电子电路系统可包括例如一个或多个处理器和一个或多个存储器。Among other things, in the example of AR glasses, the display is designed to overlay images on top of the user's view of their real-world environment, for example by projecting light into the user's eyes. The wearable device may also include an ambient light sensor, and may also include electronic circuitry to control at least some of the aforementioned components and perform associated data processing functions. Electronic circuitry may include, for example, one or more processors and one or more memories.

需要说明的是,除非另有明确的规定和限定,术语“安装”、“连接”等应做广义理解,例如,可以是固定连接,也可以是可拆卸连接,或一体连接;可以是机械连接,也可以是电连接;可以是直接相连,也可以通过中间媒介间接相连,还可以是两个元件内部的连通。对于本领域技术人员而言,可以具体情况理解上述术语在本文中的具体含义。It should be noted that, unless otherwise clearly stipulated and limited, the terms "installation" and "connection" should be understood in a broad sense, for example, it can be a fixed connection, a detachable connection, or an integral connection; it can be a mechanical connection , can also be an electrical connection; it can be a direct connection, or an indirect connection through an intermediary, or an internal connection between two components. Those skilled in the art can understand the specific meanings of the above terms herein in specific situations.

电子设备系统80Electronic Equipment Systems 80

请参阅图53,图53是本申请一些实施例中电子设备系统80的使用场景示意图。电子设备系统80可以包括处理设备801、可穿戴设备700以及触控模组600,处理设备801具有触控屏,可穿戴设备700具有显示屏。触控模组600可拆卸地装配于处理设备801上。在触控模组600装配于处理设备801上时,触控模组600可作用于处理设备801的触控屏以实现诸如按压、旋转以及滑动等实体触控操作,进而丰富用户的操作方式以及提升用户的实体操作体验。可穿戴设备700可以与处理设备801信号连接,以使得触控模组600在作用于处理设备801的触控屏时可以控制可穿戴设备700的显示屏的显示内容,即通过触控模组600可以实现处理设备801与可穿戴设备700之间的交互。Please refer to FIG. 53 . FIG. 53 is a schematic diagram of usage scenarios of the electronic device system 80 in some embodiments of the present application. The electronic device system 80 may include a processing device 801 , a wearable device 700 and a touch module 600 , the processing device 801 has a touch screen, and the wearable device 700 has a display screen. The touch module 600 is detachably assembled on the processing device 801 . When the touch module 600 is installed on the processing device 801, the touch module 600 can act on the touch screen of the processing device 801 to realize physical touch operations such as pressing, rotating and sliding, thereby enriching the user's operation methods and Improve the user's physical operation experience. The wearable device 700 can be connected with the signal processing device 801, so that the touch module 600 can control the display content of the display screen of the wearable device 700 when acting on the touch screen of the processing device 801, that is, through the touch module 600 Interaction between the processing device 801 and the wearable device 700 can be achieved.

其中,处理设备801可以为前述实施例中的电子设备800或者电子设备900。其中,处理设备801可以包括各种具有无线通信功能的手持设备、车载设备、可穿戴设备、计算设备或连接到无线调制解调器的其他处理设备,以及各种形式的用户设备(User Equipment,UE),移动台(Mobile Station,MS),终端设备(terminal device)等。为方便描述,上面提到的设备统称为处理设备801。Wherein, the processing device 801 may be the electronic device 800 or the electronic device 900 in the foregoing embodiments. Wherein, the processing device 801 may include various handheld devices with wireless communication functions, vehicle-mounted devices, wearable devices, computing devices or other processing devices connected to a wireless modem, and various forms of user equipment (User Equipment, UE), Mobile station (Mobile Station, MS), terminal equipment (terminal device), etc. For convenience of description, the devices mentioned above are collectively referred to as processing device 801 .

处理设备801可被配置成信号连接将数据传递到可穿戴设备700,信号连接可以是有线连接、无线连接或其组合。The processing device 801 may be configured to transfer data to the wearable device 700 through a signal connection, which may be a wired connection, a wireless connection or a combination thereof.

可穿戴设备700可为VR眼镜、AR眼镜、MR(Mix Reality,混合现实)眼镜,或者还可为其他可戴于头部的智能眼镜等。可穿戴设备700可如图53所示呈眼镜形状。可穿戴设备700通过在与穿戴用户左眼和右眼对应的显示屏区域显示相应的内容,从而可使用户体验到虚拟现实(Virtual Reality,VR)和增强现实(Augmented Reality,AR)的显示效果。The wearable device 700 may be VR glasses, AR glasses, MR (Mix Reality, mixed reality) glasses, or other smart glasses that can be worn on the head. The wearable device 700 may be in the shape of glasses as shown in FIG. 53 . The wearable device 700 enables the user to experience the display effects of virtual reality (Virtual Reality, VR) and augmented reality (Augmented Reality, AR) by displaying corresponding content in the display area corresponding to the left and right eyes of the wearable user. .

可穿戴设备700与处理设备801信号连接,以在处理设备801的控制下进行内容显示,即处理设备801可作为可穿戴设备700的主机。The wearable device 700 is signal-connected with the processing device 801 to display content under the control of the processing device 801 , that is, the processing device 801 can serve as a host of the wearable device 700 .

可以理解的,用户在佩戴可穿戴设备700时,注意力在可穿戴设备700所带来的虚拟场景中,而在处理设备801的触控屏上难以进行盲控操作,需要经常低头确认按键位置从而进行操作,这种交互方式使用户无法进行流畅的交互,对可穿戴设备700的整体用户体验带来了负面的影响。基于此,本申请实施例通过在处理设备801上可拆卸地装配触控模组600,以提供一种用户可以解放双眼的交互方式,进而通过触控模组600的实体触控操作,保证用户在使用可穿戴设备700时的流畅体验。It is understandable that when the user wears the wearable device 700, his attention is focused on the virtual scene brought by the wearable device 700, but it is difficult to perform blind control operations on the touch screen of the processing device 801, and it is necessary to often lower his head to confirm the button position Therefore, the operation is performed, and this interaction mode prevents the user from performing smooth interaction, which has a negative impact on the overall user experience of the wearable device 700 . Based on this, the embodiment of the present application detachably assembles the touch module 600 on the processing device 801 to provide an interactive mode in which the user can release both eyes, and then through the physical touch operation of the touch module 600, the user A smooth experience while using the wearable device 700 .

请参阅图54,图54是本申请一些实施例中电子设备系统80的部分结构示意图,图54中示意出了触控模组600装配于处理设备801上的结构示意图。其中,处理设备801可以具有首尾相连的多条边,该多条边环绕于处理设备801的触控屏810的外周沿设置。Please refer to FIG. 54 . FIG. 54 is a partial structural diagram of the electronic device system 80 in some embodiments of the present application. FIG. 54 shows a schematic structural diagram of the touch module 600 assembled on the processing device 801 . Wherein, the processing device 801 may have multiple sides connected end to end, and the multiple sides are arranged around the outer periphery of the touch screen 810 of the processing device 801 .

以处理设备801呈矩形状为例,即处理设备801可以具有首尾相连的四条边(第一边801a、第二边801b、第三边801c以及第四边801d)。Taking the rectangular shape of the processing device 801 as an example, that is, the processing device 801 may have four sides connected end to end (a first side 801a, a second side 801b, a third side 801c, and a fourth side 801d).

其中,第一边801a、第二边801b、第三边801c以及第四边801d配合围绕形成处理设备801的外轮廓形状,并环绕于触控屏810的外周沿设置。可选地,第一边801a和第三边801c相对且平行设置,第二边801b和第四边801d相对且平行设置。在一个实施例中,第一边801a和第三边801c的长度相同,第二边801b和第四边801d的长度相同,且第一边801a和第三边801c的长度大于第二边801b和第四边801d的长度。可以理解的,第一边801a、第二边801b、第三边801c以及第四边801d是相对而言的,在本申请实施例中并不限定第一边801a和第三边801c的长度一定大于第二边801b和第四边801d的长度,也可以是第一边801a和第三边801c的长度等于第二边801b和第四边801d的长度,即处理设备801为正方形。显然的,处理设备801可以为长方形、正方形、梯形等形状。当然,在其他实施例中,处理设备801还可以为具有首尾相连的两条边、三条边、五条边等形状,不作赘述。Wherein, the first side 801 a , the second side 801 b , the third side 801 c and the fourth side 801 d cooperate to form the outer contour shape of the processing device 801 , and are arranged around the outer periphery of the touch screen 810 . Optionally, the first side 801a is arranged opposite to and parallel to the third side 801c, and the second side 801b is arranged opposite to and parallel to the fourth side 801d. In one embodiment, the first side 801a and the third side 801c have the same length, the second side 801b and the fourth side 801d have the same length, and the first side 801a and the third side 801c are longer than the second side 801b and The length of the fourth side 801d. It can be understood that the first side 801a, the second side 801b, the third side 801c, and the fourth side 801d are relative terms, and in the embodiment of the present application, the lengths of the first side 801a and the third side 801c are not limited to a certain length. It is longer than the length of the second side 801b and the fourth side 801d, or the length of the first side 801a and the third side 801c is equal to the length of the second side 801b and the fourth side 801d, that is, the processing device 801 is a square. Obviously, the processing device 801 may be in the shape of a rectangle, a square, a trapezoid, or the like. Of course, in other embodiments, the processing device 801 may also be in a shape with two sides connected end to end, three sides, five sides, etc., which will not be repeated here.

进一步地,处理设备801的相邻两边之间围设形成角部区域811。以处理设备801呈矩形状为例,其角部区域811可以有4个。即第一边801a与第二边801b之间形成一角部区域、第二边801b与第三边801c之间形成另一角部区域、第三边801c与第四边801d之间形成又一角部区域、第四边801d与第一边801a之间形成又一角部区域。Further, a corner area 811 is formed between adjacent two sides of the processing device 801 . Taking the rectangular shape of the processing device 801 as an example, there may be four corner regions 811 . That is, a corner region is formed between the first side 801a and the second side 801b, another corner region is formed between the second side 801b and the third side 801c, and yet another corner region is formed between the third side 801c and the fourth side 801d. 1. Another corner region is formed between the fourth side 801d and the first side 801a.

触控模组600可拆卸地装配于上述角部区域811,并可作用于触控屏810位于对应的角部区域811的部分。可以理解的,在处理设备801呈矩形状时,其角部区域811可以有4个,与之对应地,触控屏810具有与上述4个角部区域811相对应的4个触控部分,每一触控部分对应设置于处理设备801的一个角部区域811上。触控模组600可以设有一个,一个触控模组600可拆卸地装配于上述4个角部区域811中的一个。此外,触控模组600也可以设有多个,每一触控模组600可拆卸地装配于上述4个角部区域811中的一个,即触控模组600可与角部区域811一一对应设置。当然,当处理设备801的形状发生改变,即角部区域811的数量发生改变时,触控模组600的数量可以作相应改变,不作赘述。The touch module 600 is detachably assembled in the corner area 811 and can act on the part of the touch screen 810 located in the corresponding corner area 811 . It can be understood that when the processing device 801 is in a rectangular shape, there may be four corner areas 811. Correspondingly, the touch screen 810 has four touch parts corresponding to the above four corner areas 811, each A touch portion is correspondingly disposed on a corner area 811 of the processing device 801 . There may be one touch module 600 , and one touch module 600 is detachably assembled in one of the above four corner regions 811 . In addition, multiple touch modules 600 can also be provided, and each touch module 600 can be detachably assembled in one of the four corner regions 811, that is, the touch module 600 can be combined with the corner regions 811. One to one corresponding setting. Of course, when the shape of the processing device 801 changes, that is, the number of the corner regions 811 changes, the number of the touch modules 600 can be changed accordingly, which will not be repeated here.

结合参阅图55至图57,图55是本申请一些实施例中处理设备801的使用状态示意图,图56是本申请一些实施例中电子设备系统80的使用状态示意图,图57是本申请另一些实施例中电子设备系统80的使用状态示意图。如图55所示,在用户单手握持使用处理设备801时,用户便于操作的触控屏810区域通常为触控屏810位于角部区域的部分。当用户习惯右手操作触控屏810时,即处理设备801呈如图57所示的使用状态时,触控模组600可以为一个,并装配于处理设备801位于右下角的角部区域。当用户习惯左手操作触控屏810时,触控模组600可以为一个,并装配于处理设备801位于左下角的角部区域。如图58所示,当用户需要双手握持使用处理设备801时,触控模组600可以设有两个,并分别装配于处理设备801位于左下角以及右下角的角部区域。Referring to Figure 55 to Figure 57 in conjunction, Figure 55 is a schematic view of the use state of the processing device 801 in some embodiments of the present application, Figure 56 is a schematic view of the use state of the electronic device system 80 in some embodiments of the present application, and Figure 57 is a schematic view of another state of the application A schematic diagram of the use state of the electronic equipment system 80 in the embodiment. As shown in FIG. 55 , when the user holds and uses the processing device 801 with one hand, the area of the touch screen 810 that is convenient for the user to operate is usually the part of the touch screen 810 located at the corner area. When the user is accustomed to operating the touch screen 810 with the right hand, that is, when the processing device 801 is in use as shown in FIG. 57 , there can be one touch module 600 installed in the lower right corner of the processing device 801 . When the user is used to operating the touch screen 810 with the left hand, there may be one touch module 600 and it is installed in the corner area of the processing device 801 located at the lower left corner. As shown in FIG. 58 , when the user needs to hold and use the processing device 801 with both hands, two touch modules 600 can be provided and installed in the corner areas of the processing device 801 at the lower left corner and the lower right corner respectively.

可以理解的,上述左下角以及右下角的相关方位描述仅用于解释用户握持操作处理设备801下的相对位置关系,如果该特定姿态发生改变时,上述相关方位的描述也相应地随之改变。It can be understood that the above descriptions of the relative orientations in the lower left corner and the lower right corner are only used to explain the relative positional relationship of the user holding the operation processing device 801, and if the specific posture changes, the above descriptions of the relative orientations will also change accordingly. .

触控模组600Touch module 600

请参阅图58,图58是本申请一些实施例中触控模组600的结构示意图,该触控模组600可以包括安装支架610以及设于安装支架610上的触控组件620。其中,触控组件620的数量可以为一个或者多个。Please refer to FIG. 58 . FIG. 58 is a schematic structural diagram of a touch module 600 in some embodiments of the present application. The touch module 600 may include a mounting bracket 610 and a touch component 620 disposed on the mounting bracket 610 . Wherein, the number of touch components 620 may be one or more.

需要说明的是,处理设备801的系统层级主要具有至少3个按键以及1个区域进行交互操作。其中,系统层级交互模块一般包括截屏按键、射线校准按键、确认键(Home按键)以及自由操作区域。自由操作区域可以完成的触控操作一般为点击进行确认以及滑动进行翻页等操作。It should be noted that the system level of the processing device 801 mainly has at least 3 buttons and 1 area for interactive operations. Among them, the system-level interaction module generally includes a screen capture button, a radiation calibration button, a confirmation button (Home button) and a free operation area. The touch operations that can be completed in the free operation area are generally operations such as clicking for confirmation and sliding for page turning.

基于此,考虑用户在进行触控操作时的舒适度,参考人体工程学的相关数据,触控模组600位于处理设备801的角部区域,且触控模组600覆盖于触控屏810上的操作区域大致呈扇形状,以契合单手或双手握持时大拇指的活动热区范围。同时在上述大拇指活动的扇形区域范围内,触控组件620可呈弧线形分布以符合用户操作习惯和提升交互舒适度。Based on this, considering the comfort level of the user when performing touch operations, and referring to relevant ergonomic data, the touch module 600 is located in the corner area of the processing device 801, and the touch module 600 is covered on the touch screen 810 The operating area of the phone is roughly fan-shaped to fit the active hot spot range of the thumb when holding it with one hand or both hands. At the same time, within the fan-shaped area where the thumb moves, the touch components 620 may be distributed in an arc shape to conform to the user's operating habits and improve interaction comfort.

此外,可以基于上述系统层级的交互操作设置4个触控组件620,以分布对应于截屏按键、射线校准按键、确认键(Home按键)以及自由操作区域,上述4个触控组件620的排布以操作的频繁度为依据。例如,确认键使用频率相对较高,作为确认键的触控组件620的尺寸可以相对较大,并可对应于扇形状的弧形边延伸方向的中心位置设置,即放置于大拇指操作最为便利舒适的区域。截屏按键使用频率相对较低,作为截屏按键的触控组件620可以放置于右下角不常用的位置。In addition, four touch components 620 can be set based on the interactive operation at the above system level, so as to distribute corresponding to the screen capture button, radiation calibration button, confirmation button (Home button) and free operation area, the arrangement of the above four touch components 620 Based on the frequency of operations. For example, the frequency of use of the confirmation key is relatively high, and the size of the touch component 620 as the confirmation key can be relatively large, and can be set corresponding to the central position of the fan-shaped arc edge extension direction, that is, it is most convenient to place it on the thumb comfort zone. The frequency of use of the screen capture button is relatively low, and the touch component 620 serving as the screen capture button can be placed in an uncommonly used position in the lower right corner.

可以理解的,上述触控组件620的分布方式仅为示例性说明,用户可以根据操作习惯灵活设置触控组件620的分布方式,以提升用户操作体验。同时,上述仅示例性说明了系统层级对应的4个基本触控操作而设置相应数量的触控组件620,但不限于此,本领域技术人员还可以根据需要灵活设置触控组件620的数量,本实施例对此不作赘述。It can be understood that the distribution of the touch components 620 described above is only an example, and the user can flexibly set the distribution of the touch components 620 according to operating habits, so as to improve the user's operating experience. At the same time, the above only exemplifies the four basic touch operations corresponding to the system level and setting a corresponding number of touch components 620, but not limited thereto, those skilled in the art can also flexibly set the number of touch components 620 according to needs, This embodiment does not describe it in detail.

进一步地,处理设备801的触控操作一般为按压操作和滑动操作,对此本实施例中的触控组件620可为前述实施例中的触控组件300和触控组件500中的至少一种,以实现按压操作和/或者滑动操作。Further, the touch operation of the processing device 801 is generally a press operation and a slide operation, and the touch component 620 in this embodiment can be at least one of the touch component 300 and the touch component 500 in the foregoing embodiments , for pressing and/or swiping.

换言之,触控组件620可以为前述实施例中的触控组件(300、500),为了便于下文描述,可以将“触控组件300”定义为“第一触控组件621”、“触控组件500”定位为“第二触控组件622”。其中,安装支架610上可以装配有第一触控组件621和第二触控组件622中的至少一者。In other words, the touch component 620 can be the touch component (300, 500) in the foregoing embodiments. For the convenience of the following description, the "touch component 300" can be defined as "the first touch component 621", "the touch component 500" is positioned as the "second touch component 622". Wherein, at least one of the first touch component 621 and the second touch component 622 may be mounted on the installation bracket 610 .

结合参阅前述实施例中的触控组件300以及图59,图59是本申请一些实施例中安装支架610的结构示意图。Referring to the touch assembly 300 in the foregoing embodiments and FIG. 59 , FIG. 59 is a schematic structural diagram of the mounting bracket 610 in some embodiments of the present application.

安装支架610可以包括相对设置的第一板体611和第二板体612、以及设于第一板体611和第二板体612之间的第一侧板613和第二侧板614。触控组件620可拆卸地装配于第一板体611背离第二板体612的一侧,并可在第一板体611靠近第二板体612的一侧实现触控操作。The mounting bracket 610 may include a first board 611 and a second board 612 oppositely disposed, and a first side board 613 and a second side board 614 disposed between the first board 611 and the second board 612 . The touch component 620 is detachably assembled on the side of the first board 611 away from the second board 612 , and can realize touch operation on the side of the first board 611 close to the second board 612 .

其中,安装支架610套设于处理设备801的角部区域811,即角部区域811位于第一板体611和第二板体612之间,第一侧板613和第二侧板614分别对应于形成角部区域811的相邻两边设置并弯折连接。Wherein, the mounting bracket 610 is sleeved on the corner area 811 of the processing device 801, that is, the corner area 811 is located between the first plate body 611 and the second plate body 612, and the first side plate 613 and the second side plate 614 correspond to It is arranged on two adjacent sides forming the corner region 811 and connected by bending.

换言之,第一板体611、第二板体612、第一侧板613以及第二侧板614围设形成安装支架610的外轮廓,且使得安装支架610可以为一端具有开口的盒状结构。处理设备801的角部区域811可以自上述开口处移入或者移出安装支架610,进而完成处理设备801与安装支架610的装配或者拆卸。其中,第一侧板613和第二侧板614可以配合限位处理设备801的角部区域811移入安装支架610的移动行程。In other words, the first board body 611 , the second board body 612 , the first side board 613 and the second side board 614 enclose the outer contour of the installation bracket 610 , and make the installation bracket 610 a box-like structure with an opening at one end. The corner area 811 of the processing device 801 can be moved into or out of the installation bracket 610 through the opening, so as to complete the assembly or disassembly of the processing device 801 and the installation bracket 610 . Wherein, the first side plate 613 and the second side plate 614 can cooperate with the corner area 811 of the limit processing device 801 to move into the movement stroke of the installation bracket 610 .

在一实施例中,第二板体612靠近第一板体611的一侧设有调节件630,该调节件630与第一板体611间隔设置,以在角部区域811装配于第一板体611和第二板体612之间时抵触于处理设备801背离第一板体611的一侧,从而使得触控组件620可以充分作用于触控屏810,以保证触控操作的效果。换言之,调节件630和第一板体611之间限定出处理设备801的角部区域811的装配空间,二者配合可夹持角部区域811。In one embodiment, the second plate body 612 is provided with an adjustment piece 630 on a side close to the first plate body 611, and the adjustment piece 630 is spaced apart from the first plate body 611 so as to be assembled on the first plate body at the corner area 811. The body 611 and the second board 612 are in contact with the side of the processing device 801 away from the first board 611, so that the touch component 620 can fully act on the touch screen 810 to ensure the effect of touch operation. In other words, an assembly space for the corner area 811 of the processing device 801 is defined between the adjustment member 630 and the first plate body 611 , and the two cooperate to clamp the corner area 811 .

其中,调节件630可以采用诸如橡胶、硅胶等弹性材料制成,以使得同一触控组件620可以适配不同厚度的处理设备801,以提升触控组件620的通用性。可以理解的,调节件630可为设于第二板体612上的筋条结构,或者可以为覆盖于第二板体612上的片状结构等。当然,在其他实施例中,第一板体611靠近第二板体612的一侧上也可设有调节件630,此时调节件630需避让触控组件620作用于触控屏810的部分。Wherein, the adjusting member 630 can be made of elastic materials such as rubber, silicone, etc., so that the same touch component 620 can adapt to processing devices 801 of different thicknesses, so as to improve the versatility of the touch component 620 . It can be understood that the adjusting member 630 may be a rib structure provided on the second plate body 612 , or may be a sheet structure covering the second plate body 612 . Of course, in other embodiments, the first board body 611 may also be provided with an adjustment member 630 on the side close to the second board body 612, and at this time, the adjustment member 630 needs to avoid the part where the touch component 620 acts on the touch screen 810 .

进一步地,第一板体611上设有第一贯穿孔611a,在第一触控组件621与处理设备801装配时,触控屏810可部分自第一贯穿孔611a外露。第一触控组件621的触控端可以穿设于第一贯穿孔611a并可作用于触控屏810以实现相应的触控操作。其中,第一触控组件621和第一贯穿孔611a的数量可以为一个或者多个,且为多个时分别一一对应设置。Further, the first board body 611 is provided with a first through hole 611a, and when the first touch component 621 is assembled with the processing device 801, the touch screen 810 can be partially exposed from the first through hole 611a. The touch terminal of the first touch component 621 can pass through the first through hole 611 a and act on the touch screen 810 to realize corresponding touch operation. Wherein, the number of the first touch component 621 and the first through hole 611a can be one or more, and when there are more than one, they are provided in one-to-one correspondence.

第一触控组件621可以包括定位组件310、按键组件320以及复位组件330。定位组件310装配于安装支架610上。按键组件320设于定位组件310上并可相对于定位组件310在第一贯穿孔611a的轴向上移动,以使得按键组件320在初始状态和按压状态之间进行切换。复位组件330设于定位组件310和按键组件320之间,并能够将按键组件320定位于初始状态。其中,按键组件320在按压状态时可作用于触控屏810以实现触控操作,复位组件330可使得按键组件320回归初始状态。The first touch component 621 may include a positioning component 310 , a button component 320 and a reset component 330 . The positioning assembly 310 is assembled on the mounting bracket 610 . The button assembly 320 is disposed on the positioning assembly 310 and can move relative to the positioning assembly 310 in the axial direction of the first through hole 611 a, so that the button assembly 320 is switched between an initial state and a pressed state. The reset component 330 is disposed between the positioning component 310 and the key component 320, and can position the key component 320 in an initial state. Wherein, the button assembly 320 can act on the touch screen 810 to realize the touch operation when in the pressed state, and the reset assembly 330 can make the button assembly 320 return to the initial state.

在一实施例中,定位组件310可以包括装配于第一板体611上的第一定位件311。可选地,第一定位件311可以环绕于第一贯穿孔611a设置。按键组件320可以包括设于第一定位件311上的活动件321,该活动件321可以相对于第一定位件311在第一贯穿孔611a的轴向上移动以作用于触控屏810。其中,第一定位件311靠近第一板体611的一侧设有容置槽311a,该容置槽311a的槽口朝向触控屏810。活动件321具有至少部分设于容置槽311a内的主体部321a以及设于主体部321a的周侧上的限位部321b。其中,主体部321a可以在容置槽311a内移动以作用于触控屏810,限位部321b与容置槽311a的底壁相配合以限位主体部321a的移动行程。具体而言,活动件321在复位组件330的作用下回归初始状态时,当限位部321b抵触于容置槽311a底壁时即可认为活动件321和按键组件320回归了初始状态。In an embodiment, the positioning assembly 310 may include a first positioning member 311 assembled on the first board 611 . Optionally, the first positioning member 311 may be disposed around the first through hole 611a. The button assembly 320 may include a movable part 321 disposed on the first positioning part 311 , and the movable part 321 may move relative to the first positioning part 311 in the axial direction of the first through hole 611 a to act on the touch screen 810 . Wherein, the side of the first positioning member 311 close to the first board 611 is provided with an accommodating groove 311 a , and the notch of the accommodating groove 311 a faces the touch screen 810 . The movable member 321 has a main body portion 321a at least partially disposed in the receiving groove 311a and a limiting portion 321b disposed on a peripheral side of the main body portion 321a. Wherein, the main body part 321a can move in the receiving groove 311a to act on the touch screen 810, and the limiting part 321b cooperates with the bottom wall of the receiving groove 311a to limit the moving stroke of the main body part 321a. Specifically, when the movable part 321 returns to the initial state under the action of the reset assembly 330 , when the limiting part 321b is in contact with the bottom wall of the accommodating groove 311a, the movable part 321 and the button assembly 320 can be considered to have returned to the initial state.

在一实施例中,按键组件320还可以包括按压件322,该按压件322设于第一定位件311背离第一板体611的一侧。其中,按压件322与主体部321a相抵触,主体部321a背离按压件322的端部为前述触控端。In an embodiment, the button assembly 320 may further include a pressing member 322 disposed on a side of the first positioning member 311 away from the first board body 611 . Wherein, the pressing member 322 is in contact with the main body portion 321a, and the end of the main body portion 321a away from the pressing member 322 is the aforementioned touch end.

在一实施例中,定位组件310还可以包括穿设于第一贯穿孔611a的第二定位件312,该第二定位件312盖设于容置槽311a的槽口。In one embodiment, the positioning assembly 310 may further include a second positioning member 312 penetrating through the first through hole 611a, and the second positioning member 312 covers the notch of the accommodating groove 311a.

其中,活动件321可以与第二定位件312相抵触或者分离,第二定位件312背离活动件321的端部为前述触控端。可选地,按键组件320和第二定位件312可以采用导电材料制成。Wherein, the movable part 321 can be in conflict with or separated from the second positioning part 312 , and the end of the second positioning part 312 facing away from the movable part 321 is the aforementioned touch-control end. Optionally, the button assembly 320 and the second positioning member 312 can be made of conductive materials.

在一实施例中,第二定位件312上设有多个限位柱312a,该多个限位柱312a在活动件321的周侧上依次间隔设置。其中,相邻两个限位柱312a之间形成用于引导限位部312b在第一贯穿孔611a的轴向上移动的限位槽312b。限位槽312b可以引导活动件321在沿靠近或者远离第二定位件312的方向上移动,以避免活动件321的移动出现偏移现象。而限位柱312a可以限制活动件321在移动时出现自转现象。In one embodiment, the second positioning member 312 is provided with a plurality of limiting columns 312 a , and the plurality of limiting columns 312 a are sequentially arranged at intervals on the peripheral side of the movable member 321 . Wherein, a limiting slot 312b for guiding the limiting portion 312b to move in the axial direction of the first through hole 611a is formed between two adjacent limiting columns 312a. The limit slot 312b can guide the movable part 321 to move in a direction approaching or away from the second positioning part 312, so as to avoid the phenomenon of deviation in the movement of the movable part 321. The limit column 312a can limit the self-rotation phenomenon of the movable part 321 when moving.

在一实施例中,第一板体611用于装配第一定位件311的一侧设有第二装配槽201b,该第二装配槽201b环绕于第一贯穿孔611a的外周缘,即第二装配槽201b可以呈环形,且连通第一贯穿孔611a。其中,第一定位件311嵌设于第二装配槽201b以实现与装配件201的装配连接。可选地,第一定位件311可以通过卡扣、磁吸,螺接等方式进行装配。In one embodiment, the side of the first plate body 611 used for assembling the first positioning member 311 is provided with a second assembling groove 201b, and the second assembling groove 201b surrounds the outer periphery of the first through hole 611a, namely the second assembling groove 201b. The fitting groove 201b may be annular and communicate with the first through hole 611a. Wherein, the first positioning part 311 is embedded in the second fitting groove 201 b to realize fitting connection with the fitting part 201 . Optionally, the first positioning member 311 can be assembled by means of buckle, magnetic attraction, screw connection and the like.

可以理解的,本实施例中第一触控组件621未尽详述的技术特征可参考前述实施例中触控组件300的具体描述,故此不再进行赘述。It can be understood that the technical features of the first touch component 621 in this embodiment that are not described in detail can refer to the specific description of the touch component 300 in the previous embodiment, so no more details are given here.

在一实施例中,第一板体611上设有第二贯穿孔611b,在第二触控组件622与处理设备801装配时,触控屏810可部分自第二贯穿孔611b外露。第二触控组件622的触控端可穿设于第二贯穿孔611b并可作用于触控屏810以实现相应的触控操作。其中,第二触控组件622和第二贯穿孔611b的数量可为一个或者多个,且为多个时分别一一对应设置。In one embodiment, the first board body 611 is provided with a second through hole 611b, and when the second touch component 622 is assembled with the processing device 801, the touch screen 810 can be partially exposed through the second through hole 611b. The touch terminal of the second touch component 622 can pass through the second through hole 611b and act on the touch screen 810 to realize corresponding touch operation. Wherein, the number of the second touch component 622 and the second through hole 611b can be one or more, and when there are more than one, they are provided in one-to-one correspondence.

结合参阅前述实施例中的触控组件500以及图59,第二触控组件622可以包括固定件510、摇杆组件520以及归位组件530。固定件510装配于第一板体611上,摇杆组件520穿设于固定件510并可相对于固定件510移动,摇杆组件520具有穿设于第二贯穿孔611b的触控端。Referring to the touch component 500 in the foregoing embodiments and FIG. 59 , the second touch component 622 may include a fixing member 510 , a rocker component 520 and a reset component 530 . The fixing part 510 is assembled on the first board body 611 , the rocker assembly 520 passes through the fixing part 510 and can move relative to the fixing part 510 , and the rocking bar assembly 520 has a touch end passing through the second through hole 611 b.

归位组件530设于固定件510和/或者摇杆组件520上,并被配置为用于提供摇杆组件520自目标位置向初始位置移动的作用力。The reset assembly 530 is disposed on the fixing member 510 and/or the rocker assembly 520 and is configured to provide an active force for the rocker assembly 520 to move from the target position to the initial position.

在一实施例中,固定件510可以环绕于第二贯穿孔611b设置。固定件510具有收容槽511以及连通收容槽511的孔512。收容槽511设于固定件510靠近第一板体611的一侧,并在第二触控组件622装配于处理设备801上时,收容槽511的槽口朝向触控屏810。孔512连通至收容槽511背离固定件510的一侧。摇杆组件520具有设于收容槽511内的第一部分521以及穿设于孔512的第二部分522。In an embodiment, the fixing member 510 may be disposed around the second through hole 611b. The fixing member 510 has a receiving groove 511 and a hole 512 communicating with the receiving groove 511 . The receiving groove 511 is disposed on a side of the fixing member 510 close to the first board 611 , and when the second touch component 622 is assembled on the processing device 801 , the notch of the receiving groove 511 faces the touch screen 810 . The hole 512 communicates with a side of the receiving groove 511 away from the fixing member 510 . The rocker assembly 520 has a first portion 521 disposed in the receiving groove 511 and a second portion 522 passed through the hole 512 .

其中,第一部分521可为前述触控端并可在收容槽511内移动。第二部分522突出于固定件510的表面设置,并在接受外力作用时可带动第一部分521在收容槽511内移动,以使得第一部分521能够接触于触控屏810的初始位置和目标位置。Wherein, the first part 521 can be the aforementioned touch terminal and can move in the receiving groove 511 . The second portion 522 protrudes from the surface of the fixing member 510 , and can drive the first portion 521 to move in the receiving groove 511 when receiving an external force, so that the first portion 521 can contact the initial position and the target position of the touch screen 810 .

摇杆组件520还可以具有第三部分523,该第三部分523设于第二部分522背离第一部分521的一侧并连接于第二部分522。其中,该第三部分523可以与固定件510间隔设置,并被配置为用于接受外力,以带动第一部分521和第二部分522移动。可选地,第三部分523在孔512的径向上的宽度不小于孔512的径向宽度。The rocker assembly 520 can also have a third part 523 , which is disposed on a side of the second part 522 away from the first part 521 and connected to the second part 522 . Wherein, the third part 523 can be spaced apart from the fixing part 510 and configured to receive an external force to drive the first part 521 and the second part 522 to move. Optionally, the width of the third portion 523 in the radial direction of the hole 512 is not smaller than the radial width of the hole 512 .

在一实施例中,第一板体611用于装配固定件510的一侧设有第三装配槽201c,该第三装配槽201c环绕于第二贯穿孔611b的外周缘,即第三装配槽201c可以呈环形,且连通第二贯穿孔611b。其中,固定件510可以嵌设于第三装配槽201c以实现与第一板体611的装配连接。可选地,固定件510可以通过卡扣、磁吸,螺接等方式进行装配。In one embodiment, the side of the first plate body 611 for assembling the fixing member 510 is provided with a third assembling groove 201c, and the third assembling groove 201c surrounds the outer periphery of the second through hole 611b, that is, the third assembling groove 201c may be annular and communicate with the second through hole 611b. Wherein, the fixing member 510 can be embedded in the third fitting groove 201c to realize the fitting connection with the first plate body 611 . Optionally, the fixing member 510 can be assembled by means of buckle, magnetic attraction, screw connection and the like.

可选地,固定件510可通过磁吸附的方式装配于第一板体611上,即固定件510和第一板体611中的一者上设有磁体、另一者上设有磁性件,通过磁吸使得固定件510可固定于第一板体611上。可选地,固定件510和第三装配槽201c中的一者上设有磁体、另一者上设有磁性件。当然,在其他实施例中,第一板体611上可取消第三装配槽201c的设置,即固定件510直接环绕于第二贯穿孔611b的外围设置。Optionally, the fixing part 510 can be assembled on the first board body 611 by magnetic adsorption, that is, one of the fixing part 510 and the first board body 611 is provided with a magnet, and the other is provided with a magnetic part, The fixing member 510 can be fixed on the first board 611 by magnetic attraction. Optionally, a magnet is provided on one of the fixing member 510 and the third assembly groove 201c, and a magnetic member is provided on the other. Certainly, in other embodiments, the setting of the third assembly groove 201c on the first plate body 611 can be omitted, that is, the fixing member 510 is directly arranged around the periphery of the second through hole 611b.

可以理解的,本实施例中第二触控组件622未尽详述的技术特征可参考前述实施例中触控组件500的具体描述,故此不再进行赘述。It can be understood that the technical features of the second touch component 622 in this embodiment that are not described in detail can refer to the specific description of the touch component 500 in the previous embodiment, so details are not repeated here.

进一步地,基于前述中用户拇指容易操作的区域大致呈扇环形区域,第一板体611和第二板体612均可呈扇环形状。Further, based on the fact that the area where the user's thumb is easy to operate is roughly a sector-shaped area, both the first plate body 611 and the second plate body 612 can be sector-shaped.

在一实施例中,安装支架610的第一侧板613和/或者第二侧板614上设有避让口615,该避让口615用于暴露处理设备801的接口。处理设备801通常具有用于实现充电的充电接口以及数据交换的数据线接口,而触控模组600通常装配于处理设备801的角部区域,即可能覆盖处理设备801的充电接口、数据线接口等。因此,通过设置避让口615以暴露出处理设备801的充电接口、数据线接口等,以满足用户的使用需求。可以理解的,当充电接口和数据线接口为分别单独设立的接口时,避让口615可设有多个,并分别对应于数据线接口和充电接口。当充电接口和数据线接口为合并式的一个接口时,避让口615可设有一个。In one embodiment, the first side plate 613 and/or the second side plate 614 of the installation bracket 610 is provided with an escape opening 615 for exposing the interface of the processing device 801 . The processing device 801 usually has a charging interface for charging and a data line interface for data exchange, and the touch module 600 is usually installed in the corner area of the processing device 801, that is, it may cover the charging interface and data line interface of the processing device 801 wait. Therefore, the avoidance opening 615 is provided to expose the charging interface, the data line interface, etc. of the processing device 801, so as to meet the usage requirements of the user. It can be understood that when the charging interface and the data line interface are separately established interfaces, there may be multiple avoidance openings 615 corresponding to the data line interface and the charging interface respectively. When the charging interface and the data line interface are an integrated interface, one escape opening 615 can be provided.

请参阅图60,图60是本申请一些实施例中触控模组600的部分结构拆分示意图。该实施例与前述实施例中触控模组600的区别在于:安装支架610的第一板体611的结构不同、以及触控组件620的结构不同。Please refer to FIG. 60 . FIG. 60 is a schematic exploded view of a partial structure of a touch module 600 in some embodiments of the present application. The difference between this embodiment and the touch module 600 in the previous embodiments lies in that: the structure of the first board 611 of the mounting bracket 610 is different, and the structure of the touch component 620 is different.

具体而言,安装支架610的第一板体611可以包括相对设置的第一定位板6111和第二定位板6112,其中,第一定位板6111和第二定位板6112可拆卸地装配连接。第一定位板6111连接设于第一侧板613以及第二侧板613背离第二板体612的一侧。即第一定位板6111、第二板体612、第一侧板613以及第二侧板614围设形成具有开口的盒状结构的安装支架610。在处理设备801的角部区域811移入安装支架610时,第一定位板6111和第二板体612配合夹持于角部区域811的相背两侧。Specifically, the first plate body 611 of the mounting bracket 610 may include a first positioning plate 6111 and a second positioning plate 6112 oppositely disposed, wherein the first positioning plate 6111 and the second positioning plate 6112 are detachably assembled and connected. The first positioning plate 6111 is connected to the side of the first side plate 613 and the second side plate 613 away from the second plate body 612 . That is, the first positioning plate 6111 , the second plate body 612 , the first side plate 613 and the second side plate 614 enclose the mounting bracket 610 forming a box-like structure with an opening. When the corner area 811 of the processing device 801 is moved into the installation bracket 610 , the first positioning plate 6111 and the second plate body 612 are cooperatively clamped on opposite sides of the corner area 811 .

第二定位板6112设于第一定位板6111背离第二板体612的一侧。The second positioning plate 6112 is disposed on a side of the first positioning plate 6111 away from the second plate body 612 .

当第一触控组件621装配于上述第一板体611上时,第一定位板6111可以为第二定位件312,第二定位板6112可以为第一定位件311。When the first touch component 621 is assembled on the first board 611 , the first positioning board 6111 can be the second positioning member 312 , and the second positioning board 6112 can be the first positioning member 311 .

即第一触控组件621的活动件321设于第一定位板6111和第二定位板6112之间,按压件322设于第二定位板6112背离第一定位板6111的一侧并穿设于第二定位板6112以抵触于活动件321。换言之,第一贯穿孔611a穿设于第二定位板6112,按压件322抵触于活动件321的端部穿设于第一贯穿孔611a以抵触于活动件321。That is, the movable part 321 of the first touch component 621 is arranged between the first positioning plate 6111 and the second positioning plate 6112, and the pressing member 322 is arranged on the side of the second positioning plate 6112 away from the first positioning plate 6111 and passes through the The second positioning plate 6112 is in contact with the movable part 321 . In other words, the first through hole 611 a passes through the second positioning plate 6112 , and the end portion of the pressing member 322 abutting against the movable part 321 passes through the first through hole 611 a to abut against the movable part 321 .

多个限位柱312a设于第一定位板6111靠近第二定位板6112的一侧,该多个限位柱312a在活动件321的周侧上依次间隔设置。活动件321的限位部312b位于相邻两个限位柱312a之间,以使得活动件312在限位柱312a的引导下移动,避免活动件312在移动时出现自转现象。A plurality of limiting columns 312 a is disposed on a side of the first positioning plate 6111 close to the second positioning plate 6112 , and the plurality of limiting columns 312 a are sequentially arranged at intervals on the peripheral side of the movable member 321 . The limiting part 312b of the movable part 321 is located between two adjacent limiting columns 312a, so that the movable part 312 moves under the guidance of the limiting columns 312a, so as to prevent the movable part 312 from rotating when moving.

可以理解的,限位柱312a可以设于第一定位板6111和第二定位板6112之间,且限位柱312a的相对两端分别抵触于第一定位板6111和第二定位板6112,以此可以在第一定位板6111和第二定位板6112之间限定出活动件312的移动行程。It can be understood that the limiting column 312a can be arranged between the first positioning plate 6111 and the second positioning plate 6112, and the opposite ends of the limiting column 312a respectively resist the first positioning plate 6111 and the second positioning plate 6112, so as to This can limit the movement stroke of the movable part 312 between the first positioning plate 6111 and the second positioning plate 6112 .

此时,触控屏810为电容式触控屏,活动件321和按压件322采用导电材料制成,第一定位板6111上设有导电部611c,该导电部611c的一端被配置为用于与活动件321相接触、另一端被配置为用于与触控屏810相接触。即在触控模组600与处理设备801装配时,导电部611c的一端与触控屏810相接触,在外力作用下活动件321移动至于导电部611c的另一端相接触,以此在触控屏810上实现按压触控操作。At this time, the touch screen 810 is a capacitive touch screen, the movable part 321 and the pressing part 322 are made of conductive materials, the first positioning plate 6111 is provided with a conductive part 611c, and one end of the conductive part 611c is configured for It is in contact with the movable part 321 , and the other end is configured to be in contact with the touch screen 810 . That is, when the touch module 600 is assembled with the processing device 801, one end of the conductive part 611c is in contact with the touch screen 810, and the movable part 321 moves to the other end of the conductive part 611c under the action of an external force. Press touch operation is realized on the screen 810.

当第二触控组件622装配于上述第一板体611上时,第一定位板6111和第二定位板6112共同构成第二触控组件622的固定件510。When the second touch component 622 is assembled on the above-mentioned first board body 611 , the first positioning plate 6111 and the second positioning plate 6112 together constitute the fixing part 510 of the second touch component 622 .

即第二贯穿孔611b包括设于第一定位板6111上的收容槽511、以及设于第二定位板6112上的孔512,收容槽511的槽口朝向触控屏810,孔512连通至收容槽511的底壁。换言之,贯穿第一定位板6111上的收容槽511以及贯穿第二定位板6112上的孔512相连通并并构成第二贯穿孔611b。摇杆组件520具有设于收容槽511内的第一部分521、穿设于孔512的第二部分522、以及设于第二部分522背离第一部分521的一侧并连接于第二部分522的第三部分523。其中,第三部分523可以设于第二定位板6112背离第一定位板6111的一侧。第二部分522的一端穿设于孔512以与第三部分523实现连接、另一端连接于第一部分521。That is, the second through hole 611b includes a receiving groove 511 provided on the first positioning plate 6111 and a hole 512 provided on the second positioning plate 6112. The bottom wall of the groove 511. In other words, the receiving groove 511 penetrating through the first positioning plate 6111 and the hole 512 penetrating through the second positioning plate 6112 are connected to form the second through hole 611b. The rocker assembly 520 has a first part 521 disposed in the receiving groove 511, a second part 522 penetrated through the hole 512, and a first part disposed on the side of the second part 522 away from the first part 521 and connected to the second part 522. 523 in three parts. Wherein, the third portion 523 may be disposed on a side of the second positioning plate 6112 away from the first positioning plate 6111 . One end of the second part 522 is passed through the hole 512 to be connected to the third part 523 , and the other end is connected to the first part 521 .

如前述,处理设备801的触控屏810可以为电容式触控屏和电阻式触控屏。当触控屏810为电阻式触控屏时,摇杆组件520可以在外力作用下使得第一部分521抵触于触控屏810以实现滑动触控操作。As mentioned above, the touch screen 810 of the processing device 801 may be a capacitive touch screen or a resistive touch screen. When the touch screen 810 is a resistive touch screen, the rocker assembly 520 can make the first part 521 contact the touch screen 810 under the action of external force to realize the sliding touch operation.

当触控屏810为电容式触控屏时,摇杆组件320可以采用导电材料制成,当手指或者导电物体触碰摇杆组件320的任意位置时,即可等效于手指或者导电物体触碰触控屏810,从而实现相应的滑动触控操作。When the touch screen 810 is a capacitive touch screen, the rocker assembly 320 can be made of conductive material. When a finger or a conductive object touches any position of the rocker assembly 320, it can be equivalent to a finger or a conductive object touching any position of the rocker assembly 320. Touch the touch screen 810 to realize a corresponding sliding touch operation.

其中,为了快速完成触控模组与处理设备之间的匹配,可参考图40实施例中所述的控制方法来实现触控模组与处理设备之间的快速匹配。Wherein, in order to quickly complete the matching between the touch module and the processing device, the control method described in the embodiment in FIG. 40 can be referred to to realize the fast matching between the touch module and the processing device.

可以理解的,本实施例通过将第一板体进行拆解,以作为触控组件的部分结构,可以进一步简化触控模组的结构,降低成本。It can be understood that in this embodiment, the structure of the touch module can be further simplified and the cost can be reduced by dismantling the first board as a part of the structure of the touch component.

本申请中的触控模组为无源控件,即无需供电结构及相关电路设计,可以简化触控模组的结构设计以及制成工艺。例如可以直接通过3D打印快速完成制作。换言之,本申请实施例提供的触控模组结构简单、成本低廉,且无源易制作,可以通用于具有触控屏的电子设备。此外,上述触控模组装配于处理设备上时能够提供更加真实的操作触控。The touch module in this application is a passive control, that is, no power supply structure and related circuit design are required, which can simplify the structure design and manufacturing process of the touch module. For example, the production can be quickly completed directly through 3D printing. In other words, the touch module provided by the embodiment of the present application has a simple structure, low cost, passive and easy to manufacture, and can be commonly used in electronic devices with touch screens. In addition, when the above-mentioned touch module is assembled on the processing device, it can provide more realistic operation touch.

本申请提供的可以装配于具有触控屏的处理设备上的触控模组,基于触控模组的结构简单、制造成本低且可模块化设计等特点,在形态设计上可以做到灵活多样性。即用户可以自定义按键、旋钮、摇杆等结构尺寸以及结构布局等,以适配于不同的处理设备外观形态,且可以适配于处理设备的不同使用场景。此外,在处理设备与可穿戴设备配合使用时,可以在处理设备的触控屏上实现盲控的操作体验。The touch module provided by this application can be assembled on a processing device with a touch screen. Based on the characteristics of the touch module, such as simple structure, low manufacturing cost, and modular design, the form design can be flexible and diverse. sex. That is, the user can customize the structural size and structural layout of buttons, knobs, joysticks, etc., to adapt to different appearances of processing equipment, and to adapt to different usage scenarios of processing equipment. In addition, when the processing device is used in conjunction with the wearable device, a blind control operation experience can be realized on the touch screen of the processing device.

可以理解的,在本申请上述部分实施例的具体应用场景中,装配件201、装配支架410、安装支架610之间可以进行互换。It can be understood that in the specific application scenarios of some of the above embodiments of the present application, the assembly part 201 , the assembly bracket 410 , and the installation bracket 610 can be interchanged.

接下来阐述一种可穿戴设备,请参阅图61,图61是本申请另一些实施例中可穿戴设备700的结构示意框图。该可穿戴设备700例如可以为VR眼镜、AR眼镜、MR(Mix Reality,混合现实)眼镜,或者还可以为其他可戴于头部的智能眼镜等。该可穿戴设备700例如可以呈眼镜形状,其内可以收容有光机组件、摄像组件等。需要说明的是,本申请不限制可穿戴设备700的形状和/或式样。Next, a wearable device will be described, please refer to FIG. 61 , which is a schematic structural block diagram of a wearable device 700 in other embodiments of the present application. The wearable device 700 may be, for example, VR glasses, AR glasses, MR (Mix Reality, mixed reality) glasses, or other smart glasses that can be worn on the head. The wearable device 700 may be in the shape of glasses, for example, and an optomechanical component, a camera component, etc. may be accommodated therein. It should be noted that the present application does not limit the shape and/or style of the wearable device 700 .

请参阅图61,可穿戴设备700可以包括:数据采集模块71、数据输出模块72、串行接口73及集成电路模块74。Referring to FIG. 61 , the wearable device 700 may include: a data collection module 71 , a data output module 72 , a serial interface 73 and an integrated circuit module 74 .

串行接口73例如可以为满足USB 2.0规范、USB3.0规范及USB3.1规范的USB接口,可包括:Micro USB接口或USB TYPE-C接口。此外,串行接口73还可以为信号接口。甚至串行接口73还可以为其他任意类型的能够用于串行数据传输的串行接口。The serial interface 73 may be, for example, a USB interface meeting the USB 2.0 specification, the USB 3.0 specification, and the USB 3.1 specification, and may include: a Micro USB interface or a USB TYPE-C interface. In addition, the serial interface 73 can also be a signal interface. Even the serial interface 73 can be any other type of serial interface that can be used for serial data transmission.

集成电路模块74可以包括:数据转换模块741及接口模块742,数据转换模块741通过接口模块742分别与数据采集模块71和数据输出模块72连接。The integrated circuit module 74 may include: a data conversion module 741 and an interface module 742 , and the data conversion module 741 is respectively connected to the data acquisition module 71 and the data output module 72 through the interface module 742 .

数据转换模块741用于对通过接口模块742从数据采集模块71采集到的数据进行串行化转换,并将转换后的串行数据通过串行接口73输出,以对转换后的串行数据进行处理,例如传输给外部设备例如电子设备、处理设备进行处理等。The data conversion module 741 is used for carrying out serialization conversion to the data collected from the data acquisition module 71 through the interface module 742, and the serial data after conversion is output through the serial interface 73, to perform serial data conversion on the converted serial data Processing, such as transmission to external equipment such as electronic equipment, processing equipment for processing, etc.

数据转换模块741还用于对通过串行接口73接收的串行数据进行转换,以将接收的串行数据转换为与接口模块742的接口协议相匹配的接口数据,并将转换后的接口数据通过接口模块742传输给数据输出模块72,以通过数据输出模块72将转换后的接口数据输出给用户。The data conversion module 741 is also used to convert the serial data received through the serial interface 73, to convert the received serial data into interface data matching the interface protocol of the interface module 742, and convert the converted interface data The data is transmitted to the data output module 72 through the interface module 742, so that the converted interface data can be output to the user through the data output module 72.

集成电路模块74例如可以被实施为ASIC(Application Specific IntegratedCircuit,专用集成电路)数据整合处理芯片,或者还可以实现为FPGA(Field ProgrammableGate Array,现场可编程逻辑门阵列)。The integrated circuit module 74 may be implemented, for example, as an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit, Application Specific Integrated Circuit) data integration processing chip, or may also be implemented as an FPGA (Field Programmable Gate Array, Field Programmable Logic Gate Array).

本申请实施例提供的可穿戴设备,在可穿戴设备中使用集成电路芯片,通过集成电路芯片中的接口模块进行数据的采集,并通过数据转换模块对采集到的数据和从主机单元接收的数据集中地进行转换,一方面可以极大地缩小可穿戴设备的空间和体积,有利于实现可穿戴设备轻薄化;另一方面还可以降低芯片的功耗,减少可穿戴设备的发热,提升用户体验;此外,集中式转换还可以降低可穿戴设备的整体数据处理延迟。The wearable device provided by the embodiment of the present application uses an integrated circuit chip in the wearable device, collects data through the interface module in the integrated circuit chip, and uses the data conversion module to convert the collected data and the data received from the host unit Concentrated conversion, on the one hand, can greatly reduce the space and volume of wearable devices, which is conducive to the realization of light and thin wearable devices; on the other hand, it can also reduce the power consumption of chips, reduce the heat generation of wearable devices, and improve user experience; In addition, centralized conversion can also reduce the overall data processing latency of wearable devices.

请参阅图62,图62是图61实施例中可穿戴设备700的另一结构示意图。该可穿戴设备700中的集成电路模块74可包括多个接口模块742,例如多个接口模块742可以分别为I2C接口模块、SPI接口模块、I2S接口模块、SLIMBus接口模块及MIPI(Mobile IndustryProcessor Interface,移动产业处理器接口)接口模块。Please refer to FIG. 62 . FIG. 62 is another structural schematic diagram of the wearable device 700 in the embodiment of FIG. 61 . The integrated circuit module 74 in the wearable device 700 can include a plurality of interface modules 742, for example, a plurality of interface modules 742 can be respectively I2C interface module, SPI interface module, I2S interface module, SLIMBus interface module and MIPI (Mobile IndustryProcessor Interface, Mobile industry processor interface) interface module.

I2C接口模块与连接的模块之间使用I2C总线进行通信,I2C总线是一种简单、双向二线制同步串行总线。它只需要两根线即可在连接于总线上的器件之间传送信息。主器件用于启动总线传送数据,并产生时钟以开放传送的器件,此时任何被寻址的器件均被认为是从器件.在总线上主和从、发和收的关系不是恒定的,而取决于此时数据传送方向。如果主器件要发送数据给从器件,则主器件首先寻址从器件,然后主动发送数据至从器件,最后由主器件终止数据传送;如果主器件要接收从器件的数据,首先由主器件寻址从器件.然后主器件接收从器件发送的数据,最后由主器件终止接收过程。在这种情况下.主器件负责产生定时时钟和终止数据传送。通常I2C是控制接口,用于传输控制信令。The I2C bus is used for communication between the I2C interface module and the connected modules. The I2C bus is a simple, two-way two-wire synchronous serial bus. It requires only two wires to transfer information between devices connected to the bus. The master device is used to start the bus to transmit data and generate a clock to open the device for transmission. At this time, any addressed device is considered a slave device. The relationship between master and slave, send and receive on the bus is not constant, and Depends on the direction of data transfer at this time. If the master device wants to send data to the slave device, the master device first addresses the slave device, then actively sends data to the slave device, and finally the master device terminates the data transfer; if the master device wants to receive data from the slave device, the master device first addresses the slave device. Address the slave device. Then the master device receives the data sent by the slave device, and finally the master device terminates the receiving process. In this case. The master device is responsible for generating the timing clock and terminating the data transfer. Usually I2C is a control interface for transmitting control signaling.

SPI接口模块与连接的模块之间使用SPI总线进行通信。SPI总线是一种高速的全双工同步的通信总线。SPI通信原理很简单,它以主从方式工作,这种模式通常有一个主设备和一个或多个从设备,需要4根线,分别用于主设备数据输入、主设备数据输出、时钟信号传输、主设备输出的使能信号传输。通常SPI接口也是控制接口,用于传输控制信令。The SPI interface module communicates with the connected modules using the SPI bus. The SPI bus is a high-speed full-duplex synchronous communication bus. The principle of SPI communication is very simple. It works in a master-slave mode. This mode usually has a master device and one or more slave devices. It requires 4 lines, which are used for master device data input, master device data output, and clock signal transmission. , The enable signal transmission output by the master device. Usually the SPI interface is also a control interface, which is used to transmit control signaling.

I2S接口模块与连接的模块之间使用I2S总线进行通信。I2S总线是针对数字音频设备(如CD播放器、数码音效处理器、数字电视音响系统)之间的音频数据传输而制定的一种总线标准。它采用了独立的导线传输时钟与数据信号的设计,通过将数据和时钟信号分离,避免了因时差诱发的失真,为用户节省了购买抵抗音频抖动的专业设备的费用,广泛应用于各种多媒体系统。标准的I2S总线电缆是由3根串行导线组成的:1根是时分多路复用(简称TDM)数据线;1根是字选择线;1根是时钟线。The I2S bus is used for communication between the I2S interface module and the connected modules. The I2S bus is a bus standard developed for audio data transmission between digital audio devices (such as CD players, digital audio processors, and digital TV audio systems). It adopts the design of independent wires to transmit clock and data signals. By separating the data and clock signals, it avoids distortion caused by time difference and saves users the cost of purchasing professional equipment that resists audio jitter. It is widely used in various multimedia system. The standard I2S bus cable is composed of 3 serial wires: 1 is a time division multiplexing (TDM for short) data line; 1 is a word selection line; 1 is a clock line.

SLIMBus接口模块与连接的模块之间使用SLIMBus总线进行通信。SLIMBus总线是MIPI联盟指定的一种音频接口,用于连接基带/应用处理器和音频芯片,通常用于传送音频数据。SLIMBus总线两端由一个接口设备和一到多个功能设备组成,接口设备和功能设备之间用一到多个端口连接,端口可以是只输入、只输出或者双向。SLIMBus总线支持动态停止和重启,并支持所有的采样频率。The SLIMBus interface module communicates with the connected modules using the SLIMBus bus. The SLIMBus bus is an audio interface specified by the MIPI Alliance, which is used to connect the baseband/application processor and the audio chip, and is usually used to transmit audio data. Both ends of the SLIMBus bus are composed of an interface device and one or more functional devices. The interface device and the functional device are connected by one or more ports. The ports can be input-only, output-only or bidirectional. The SLIMBus bus supports dynamic stop and restart, and supports all sampling frequencies.

MIPI接口模块与连接的模块之间采用MIPI接口规范进行通信。MIPI是MIPI联盟发起的为移动应用处理器制定的开放标准和一个规范。目的是把手机内部的接口如摄像头、显示屏接口、射频/基带接口等标准化,从而减少手机设计的复杂程度和增加设计灵活性。MIPI多媒体规范主要分为三层,即应用层、协议层和物理层。主要应用于摄像头、显示器等设备的接口,其中可包括摄像头接口CSI(Camera Serial Interface)、显示接口DSI(Display Serial Interface)等。The MIPI interface specification is used for communication between the MIPI interface module and the connected modules. MIPI is an open standard and a specification for mobile application processors initiated by the MIPI Alliance. The purpose is to standardize the internal interfaces of the mobile phone, such as camera, display interface, radio frequency/baseband interface, etc., thereby reducing the complexity of mobile phone design and increasing design flexibility. The MIPI multimedia specification is mainly divided into three layers, namely the application layer, the protocol layer and the physical layer. It is mainly used in interfaces of cameras, monitors and other devices, which may include camera interface CSI (Camera Serial Interface), display interface DSI (Display Serial Interface), etc.

如图62所示,可穿戴设备700可包括多个数据采集模块71,例如多个数据采集模块71可以分别为:音频数据采集模块、视频数据采集模块(前述实施例中的摄像组件)、眼动追踪模块及传感数据采集模块。As shown in Figure 62, the wearable device 700 may include a plurality of data acquisition modules 71, for example, the plurality of data acquisition modules 71 may be respectively: an audio data acquisition module, a video data acquisition module (camera assembly in the foregoing embodiments), an eye Motion tracking module and sensor data acquisition module.

其中,音频数据采集模块例如可以包括麦克风及音频编解码器(Codec)。音频编解码器对通过麦克风采集到的数据进行音频编码。Wherein, the audio data acquisition module may include, for example, a microphone and an audio codec (Codec). The audio codec performs audio encoding on the data collected by the microphone.

视频数据采集模块例如可以包括摄像头,如普通相机的镜头、IR(Infrared Ray,红外线)相机的IR镜头等。The video data acquisition module may include, for example, a camera, such as an ordinary camera lens, an IR lens of an IR (Infrared Ray, infrared) camera, and the like.

眼动追踪是一项科学应用技术,当人的眼睛看向不同方向时,眼部会有细微的变化,这些变化会产生可以提取的特征,计算机可以通过图像捕捉或扫描提取这些特征,从而实时追踪眼睛的变化,预测用户的状态和需求,并进行响应,达到用眼睛控制设备的目的,例如用户无需触摸屏幕即可翻动页面。从原理上看,眼动追踪主要是研究眼球运动信息的获取、建模和模拟,用途颇广。而获取眼球运动信息的设备除了眼动仪之外,还可以是图像采集设备,甚至一般电脑或手机上的摄像头,其在软件的支持下也可以实现眼球跟踪。Eye tracking is a scientific application technology. When people's eyes look in different directions, there will be subtle changes in the eyes. These changes will produce features that can be extracted. Computers can extract these features through image capture or scanning, so as to achieve real-time Track changes in the eyes, predict the user's status and needs, and respond, to achieve the purpose of controlling the device with the eyes, for example, the user can turn the page without touching the screen. In principle, eye tracking is mainly to study the acquisition, modeling and simulation of eye movement information, and it has a wide range of uses. In addition to the eye tracker, the device for obtaining eye movement information can also be an image acquisition device, or even a camera on a general computer or mobile phone, which can also achieve eye tracking with the support of software.

眼动追踪模块如上述可以包括眼动仪、图像采集设备等。As mentioned above, the eye tracking module may include an eye tracker, an image acquisition device, and the like.

传感数据采集模块例如可以包括:接近传感器(Proximity Sensor)、IMD(Inertial Measurement Unit,惯性测量装置)、可见光传感器(Ambient Light Sensor)等。The sensing data acquisition module may include, for example: a proximity sensor (Proximity Sensor), an IMD (Inertial Measurement Unit, inertial measurement device), a visible light sensor (Ambient Light Sensor), and the like.

其中,接近传感器(例如第一FPC523上设置的距离传感器,)是代替限位开关等接触式检测方式,以无需接触检测对象进行检测为目的的传感器的总称。能检测对象的移动信息和存在信息转换为电气信号。感应型接近传感器的检测原理是通过外部磁场影响,检测在导体表面产生的涡电流引起的磁性损耗。在检测线圈内使其产生交流磁场,并检测体的金属体产生的涡电流引起的阻抗变化进行检测的方式。此外,作为另外一种方式,还可包括检测频率相位成分的铝检测传感器,和通过工作线圈仅检测阻抗变化成分的全金属传感器等。Among them, the proximity sensor (for example, the distance sensor provided on the first FPC523 ) is a general term for sensors that replace contact detection methods such as limit switches and are aimed at detection without contact with the detection object. The movement information and presence information of the detected object can be converted into electrical signals. The detection principle of the inductive proximity sensor is to detect the magnetic loss caused by the eddy current generated on the surface of the conductor through the influence of an external magnetic field. A method in which an AC magnetic field is generated in the detection coil and the impedance change caused by the eddy current generated by the metal body of the detection body is detected. In addition, as another way, it may also include an aluminum detection sensor that detects frequency and phase components, and an all-metal sensor that only detects impedance change components through a working coil.

IMD用于测量物体三轴姿态角(或角速率)以及加速度的装置。一般的,一个IMU包含了三个单轴的加速度计和三个单轴的陀螺,加速度计检测物体在载体坐标系统独立三轴的加速度信号,而陀螺检测载体相对于导航坐标系的角速度信号,测量物体在三维空间中的角速度和加速度,并以此解算出物体的姿态。IMD is a device used to measure the three-axis attitude angle (or angular rate) and acceleration of an object. Generally, an IMU includes three single-axis accelerometers and three single-axis gyroscopes. The accelerometer detects the acceleration signals of the three-axis independent object in the carrier coordinate system, and the gyroscope detects the angular velocity signal of the carrier relative to the navigation coordinate system. Measure the angular velocity and acceleration of an object in three-dimensional space, and use this to calculate the attitude of the object.

可见光传感器将可见光作为探测对象,并转换成输出信号的器件。可见光传感器可以感受有规律的被测量,并按照一定的规律转换成可用输出信号的器件或装置。Visible light sensors use visible light as a detection object and convert it into an output signal. Visible light sensor is a device or device that can sense regular measured objects and convert them into usable output signals according to certain rules.

音频数据采集模块71如可以通过SLIMBus接口模块742及SPI接口模块742与数据转换模块741连接。其中,音频数据采集模块71与SPI接口模块742之间可以传输控制信号,音频数据采集模块71与SLIMBus接口模块742之间可以传输音频数据。The audio data acquisition module 71 can be connected with the data conversion module 741 through the SLIMBus interface module 742 and the SPI interface module 742, for example. Wherein, control signals can be transmitted between the audio data collection module 71 and the SPI interface module 742 , and audio data can be transmitted between the audio data collection module 71 and the SLIMBus interface module 742 .

视频数据采集模块71如可以通过MIPI接口模块742及I2C接口模块742与数据转换模块741连接。其中,视频数据采集模块71与MIPI接口模块742之间可以传输视频数据,视频数据采集模块71与I2C接口模块742之间可以传输控制信号。The video data collection module 71 can be connected with the data conversion module 741 through the MIPI interface module 742 and the I2C interface module 742, for example. Wherein, video data can be transmitted between the video data collection module 71 and the MIPI interface module 742 , and control signals can be transmitted between the video data collection module 71 and the I2C interface module 742 .

眼动追踪模块71如可以通过MIPI接口模块742及I2C接口模块742与数据转换模块741连接。其中,眼动追踪模块71与MIPI接口模块742之间可以传输眼动追踪数据,眼动追踪模块71与I2C接口模块742之间可以传输控制信号。The eye tracking module 71 can be connected with the data conversion module 741 through the MIPI interface module 742 and the I2C interface module 742 . Wherein, eye-tracking data can be transmitted between the eye-tracking module 71 and the MIPI interface module 742 , and control signals can be transmitted between the eye-tracking module 71 and the I2C interface module 742 .

传感数据采集模块71如可以通过I2C接口模块742与数据转换模块741连接。传感数据采集模块71与I2C接口模块742之间可以传输传感数据,此外也可以传输控制信号。The sensing data collection module 71 can be connected with the data conversion module 741 through the I2C interface module 742 , for example. Sensing data can be transmitted between the sensing data acquisition module 71 and the I2C interface module 742 , and control signals can also be transmitted.

可穿戴设备700例如也可以包括多个数据输出模块72。多个数据输出模块72如可以包括显示模块72及音频数据输出模块72。其中,显示模块72例如可以为前述实施例中的光机组件。The wearable device 700 may also include multiple data output modules 72 , for example. The plurality of data output modules 72 may include, for example, a display module 72 and an audio data output module 72 . Wherein, the display module 72 may be, for example, the optical-mechanical assembly in the foregoing embodiments.

音频数据输出模块72例如可以包括扬声器(佩戴组件中的扬声器组件)和/或耳机接口,通过外接耳机来输出音频数据。The audio data output module 72 may include, for example, a speaker (a speaker assembly in the wearing assembly) and/or an earphone interface, and outputs audio data through an external earphone.

显示模块72如可以通过MIPO接口模块742及I2C接口模块742与数据转换模块741连接。其中,显示模块72与MIPO接口模块742之间可以传输待显示的视频数据,显示模块72与I2C接口模块742可以传输控制信号。For example, the display module 72 can be connected to the data conversion module 741 through the MIPO interface module 742 and the I2C interface module 742 . Wherein, video data to be displayed can be transmitted between the display module 72 and the MIPO interface module 742 , and control signals can be transmitted between the display module 72 and the I2C interface module 742 .

音频数据输出模块72如可以通过I2S接口模块742及I2C接口模块742与数据转换模块741连接。其中,音频数据输出模块72与I2S接口模块742之间可以传输待输出的音频数据,音频数据输出模块72与I2C接口模块742之间可以传输控制信号。The audio data output module 72 can be connected with the data conversion module 741 through the I2S interface module 742 and the I2C interface module 742 , for example. Wherein, audio data to be output can be transmitted between the audio data output module 72 and the I2S interface module 742 , and control signals can be transmitted between the audio data output module 72 and the I2C interface module 742 .

此外,集成电路模块74还可以包括时钟模块743,分别与数据转换模块741及各接口模块742连接,用于为各模块输出时钟信号。In addition, the integrated circuit module 74 may further include a clock module 743, which is respectively connected to the data conversion module 741 and each interface module 742, and is used to output a clock signal for each module.

在一些实施例中,集成电路模块74还可以包括:数据压缩模块744及数据解压模块745。In some embodiments, the integrated circuit module 74 may further include: a data compression module 744 and a data decompression module 745 .

其中,数据压缩模块744及数据解压模块745分别连接于数据转换模块741与串行接口73之间。Wherein, the data compression module 744 and the data decompression module 745 are respectively connected between the data conversion module 741 and the serial interface 73 .

数据压缩模块744用于在数据转换模块741将转换后的串行数据通过串行接口73输出之前,对待输出的串行数据进行压缩,并将压缩后的串行数据通过串行接口73输出。The data compression module 744 is configured to compress the serial data to be output before the data conversion module 741 outputs the converted serial data through the serial interface 73 , and output the compressed serial data through the serial interface 73 .

数据解压模块745用于在数据转换模块741通过串行接口73接收串行数据之前,对通过串行接口73接收的串行数据进行解压缩,并将解压缩后的串行数据传输给数据转换模块741以进行转换。The data decompression module 745 is used to decompress the serial data received through the serial interface 73 before the data conversion module 741 receives the serial data through the serial interface 73, and transmit the decompressed serial data to the data conversion module 741. Module 741 to convert.

通过对待传输的数据进行压缩,可以节省传输带宽,提高传输速率,从而进一步保证数据的实时性,提升用户的体验。但需要说明的是,本申请不限制采用的数据压缩/解压缩算法,具体算法在实际应用中可以根据需求选择。By compressing the data to be transmitted, the transmission bandwidth can be saved and the transmission rate can be increased, thereby further ensuring the real-time performance of the data and improving the user experience. However, it should be noted that the application does not limit the data compression/decompression algorithm used, and specific algorithms can be selected according to requirements in practical applications.

在一些实施例中,可穿戴设备700还可以包括:电源管理模块75,与串行接口73连接,用于通过串行接口73接收与串行接口73连接的电源提供装置提供的电能,以为可穿戴设备700进行供电。In some embodiments, the wearable device 700 may also include: a power management module 75, connected to the serial interface 73, configured to receive the power provided by the power supply device connected to the serial interface 73 through the serial interface 73, so as to The wearable device 700 supplies power.

请参阅图63,图63是图61实施例中可穿戴设备700的另一结构示意图。可穿戴设备700还可进一步包括主机单元76。主机单元76可包括:处理模块761、串行接口762及集成电路模块763。Please refer to FIG. 63 . FIG. 63 is another structural schematic diagram of the wearable device 700 in the embodiment of FIG. 61 . The wearable device 700 may further include a host unit 76 . The host unit 76 may include: a processing module 761 , a serial interface 762 and an integrated circuit module 763 .

其中,处理模块761与集成电路模块763连接。处理模块761例如可以为应用处理器(Application Processor,AP),用于对接收的数据进行处理,并将处理后的数据(视频数据和/或音频数据)通过集成电路模块763返回至集成电路模块74进行输出。Wherein, the processing module 761 is connected with the integrated circuit module 763 . The processing module 761 can be, for example, an application processor (Application Processor, AP), which is used to process the received data, and return the processed data (video data and/or audio data) to the integrated circuit module through the integrated circuit module 763 74 for output.

对应于串行接口73,串行接口762也可以为满足USB 2.0规范、USB3.0规范及USB3.1规范的USB接口,可包括:Micro USB接口或USB TYPE-C接口。此外,串行接口762还可以为其他任意类型的能够用于串行数据传输的串行接口。可在串行接口762与串行接口73之间连接缆线。Corresponding to the serial interface 73, the serial interface 762 can also be a USB interface meeting the USB 2.0 specification, the USB 3.0 specification and the USB 3.1 specification, and can include: a Micro USB interface or a USB TYPE-C interface. In addition, the serial interface 762 can also be any other type of serial interface that can be used for serial data transmission. A cable can be connected between the serial interface 762 and the serial interface 73 .

集成电路模块763可包括:数据转换模块7631及接口模块7632。数据转换模块7631通过接口模块7632与处理模块761连接。数据转换模块7631用于对通过串行接口762接收的串行数据进行转换,以将接收的串行数据转换为与接口模块7632的接口协议相匹配的接口数据,并将转换后的接口数据通过接口模块7632传输给处理模块761。The integrated circuit module 763 may include: a data conversion module 7631 and an interface module 7632 . The data conversion module 7631 is connected with the processing module 761 through the interface module 7632 . The data conversion module 7631 is used to convert the serial data received through the serial interface 762, so as to convert the received serial data into interface data matching the interface protocol of the interface module 7632, and pass the converted interface data through The interface module 7632 transmits to the processing module 761.

数据转换模块7631还用于对通过接口模块7632从处理模块761接收的处理后的数据(音频数据和/或视频数据)进行串行化处理,并将转换后的串行数据通过串行接口762输出给串行接口73。The data conversion module 7631 is also used to serialize the processed data (audio data and/or video data) received from the processing module 761 through the interface module 7632, and pass the converted serial data through the serial interface 762 Output to the serial interface 73.

本领域技术人员可以理解的是,主机单元76如可以为与可穿戴设备700配套的专用设备,或者主机单元76还可以为配置有上述集成电路模块763的电子设备、处理设备(如智能手机、平板电脑等)。其中电子设备、处理设备中的处理器(如CPU或AP)可以为上述处理模块761,通过在电子设备中安装相应的应用程序,使得其处理器可以对通过集成电路模块763接收的数据进行相应的处理。Those skilled in the art can understand that the host unit 76 can be a dedicated device matched with the wearable device 700, or the host unit 76 can also be an electronic device or a processing device (such as a smart phone, tablet, etc.). Wherein the processor (such as CPU or AP) in the electronic device and processing device can be the above-mentioned processing module 761, by installing the corresponding application program in the electronic device, so that its processor can perform corresponding processing on the data received by the integrated circuit module 763 processing.

请参阅图64,图64是图63实施例中主机单元76的结构示意图。主机单元76中的集成电路模块763可以包括多个接口模块7632,多个接口模块7632相应地也可以为I2C接口模块、SPI接口模块、I2S接口模块、SLIMBus接口模块及MIPI接口模块。Please refer to FIG. 64 , which is a schematic structural diagram of the host unit 76 in the embodiment of FIG. 63 . The integrated circuit module 763 in the host unit 76 may include multiple interface modules 7632, and the multiple interface modules 7632 may also be I2C interface modules, SPI interface modules, I2S interface modules, SLIMBus interface modules and MIPI interface modules accordingly.

其中,数据转换模块7631可以通过SLIMBus接口模块7632及SPI接口模块7632,将转换后的音频数据传输给处理模块761;数据转换模块7631可以通过MIPI接口模块7632及I2C接口模块7632将转换后的视频数据传输给处理模块761;数据转换模块7631可以通过MIPI接口模块7632及I2C接口模块7632将转换后的眼动追踪数据传输给处理模块761;数据转换模块7631可以通过I2C接口模块7632将转换后的传感数据传输给处理模块761。Wherein, the data conversion module 7631 can transmit the converted audio data to the processing module 761 through the SLIMBus interface module 7632 and the SPI interface module 7632; The data is transmitted to the processing module 761; the data conversion module 7631 can transmit the converted eye tracking data to the processing module 761 through the MIPI interface module 7632 and the I2C interface module 7632; The sensory data is transmitted to the processing module 761 .

集成电路模块763还可以包括时钟模块7633,用于向数据转换模块7631及各接口模块7632发送时钟信号。The integrated circuit module 763 may further include a clock module 7633 for sending clock signals to the data conversion module 7631 and each interface module 7632 .

在一些实施例中,集成电路模块763还可以包括:数据压缩模块7634及数据解压模块7635。In some embodiments, the integrated circuit module 763 may further include: a data compression module 7634 and a data decompression module 7635 .

其中,数据压缩模块7634及数据解压模块7635分别连接于数据转换模块7631与串行接口762之间。Wherein, the data compression module 7634 and the data decompression module 7635 are respectively connected between the data conversion module 7631 and the serial interface 762 .

数据解压模块7635用于在数据转换模块7631通过串行接口762从串行接口73接收串行数据之前,对通过串行接口762接收的串行数据进行解压缩,并将解压缩后的串行数据传输给数据转换模块7631以进行转换。The data decompression module 7635 is used to decompress the serial data received through the serial interface 762 before the data conversion module 7631 receives the serial data from the serial interface 73 through the serial interface 762, and decompress the decompressed serial data The data is transmitted to the data conversion module 7631 for conversion.

数据压缩模块7634用于在数据转换模块7631将转换后的串行数据通过串行接口762输出之前,对待输出的串行数据进行压缩,并将压缩后的串行数据通过串行接口762输出给串行接口73。The data compression module 7634 is used to compress the serial data to be output before the data conversion module 7631 outputs the converted serial data through the serial interface 762, and output the compressed serial data to the Serial interface 73 .

本领域技术人员应理解的是,数据压缩模块744使用的压缩算法应与图32中主机单元76中的数据解压模块7635使用的解压缩算法相匹配,而主机单元76中的数据压缩模块7634使用的压缩算法应与图32中数据解压模块745使用的解压缩算法相匹配。Those skilled in the art should understand that the compression algorithm used by the data compression module 744 should match the decompression algorithm used by the data decompression module 7635 in the host unit 76 in Figure 32, and the data compression module 7634 in the host unit 76 uses The compression algorithm of should match the decompression algorithm used by the data decompression module 745 in FIG. 32 .

通过对待传输的数据进行压缩,可以节省传输带宽,提高传输速率,从而进一步保证数据的实时性,提升用户的体验。但需要说明的是,本申请不限制采用的数据压缩/解压缩算法,具体算法在实际应用中可以根据需求选择。By compressing the data to be transmitted, the transmission bandwidth can be saved and the transmission rate can be increased, thereby further ensuring the real-time performance of the data and improving the user experience. However, it should be noted that the application does not limit the data compression/decompression algorithm used, and specific algorithms can be selected according to requirements in practical applications.

在一些实施例中,主机单元76还可以包括:电源管理模块764与电池765。电源管理模块764分别与电池765和串行接口762连接,用于将电池765提供的电能通过串行接口762提供给串行接口762,以为集成电路模块74、数据采集模块71、数据输出模块72供电。In some embodiments, the host unit 76 may further include: a power management module 764 and a battery 765 . The power management module 764 is respectively connected with the battery 765 and the serial interface 762, and is used to provide the electric energy provided by the battery 765 to the serial interface 762 through the serial interface 762, so as to provide the integrated circuit module 74, the data acquisition module 71, and the data output module 72 powered by.

如上述,主机单元76还可以被实施为电子设备、处理设备。As mentioned above, the host unit 76 may also be implemented as an electronic device, a processing device.

应当注意,尽管在上文详细描述中提及了用于动作执行的设备的若干模块或者单元,但是这种划分并非强制性的。实际上,根据本申请的实施方式,上文描述的两个或更多模块或者单元的特征和功能可以在一个模块或者单元中具体化。反之,上文描述的一个模块或者单元的特征和功能可以进一步划分为由多个模块或者单元来具体化。It should be noted that although several modules or units of the device for action execution are mentioned in the above detailed description, this division is not mandatory. Actually, according to the embodiment of the present application, the features and functions of two or more modules or units described above may be embodied in one module or unit. Conversely, the features and functions of one module or unit described above can be further divided to be embodied by a plurality of modules or units.

需要说明的是,术语“包括”和“具有”以及他们任何变形,意图在于覆盖不排他的包含。例如包含了一系列步骤或单元的过程、方法、系统、产品或设备没有限定于已列出的步骤或单元,而是可选地还包括没有列出的步骤或单元,或可选地还包括对于这些过程、方法、产品或设置固有的其他步骤或单元。It should be noted that the terms "including" and "having" and any variations thereof are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusion. For example, a process, method, system, product or device comprising a series of steps or units is not limited to the listed steps or units, but optionally also includes unlisted steps or units, or optionally further includes other steps or elements inherent in these processes, methods, products or arrangements.

以上所述仅为本申请的部分实施例,并非因此限制本申请的保护范围,凡是利用本申请说明书及附图内容所作的等效装置或等效流程变换,或直接或间接运用在其他相关的技术领域,均同理包括在本申请的专利保护范围内。The above descriptions are only part of the embodiments of the application, and are not intended to limit the scope of protection of the application. All equivalent devices or equivalent process transformations made by using the contents of the specification and drawings of the application, or directly or indirectly used in other related All technical fields are equally included in the patent protection scope of the present application.

Claims (10)

1.一种触控模组,其特征在于,所述触控模组包括安装支架以及设于所述安装支架上的触控组件;1. A touch module, characterized in that, the touch module includes a mounting bracket and a touch component arranged on the mounting bracket; 其中,所述安装支架包括相对设置的第一板体和第二板体,所述触控组件可拆卸地装配于所述第一板体背离所述第二板体的一侧,并可在所述第一板体靠近所述第二板体的一侧实现触控操作。Wherein, the mounting bracket includes a first board and a second board oppositely arranged, the touch component is detachably assembled on the side of the first board away from the second board, and can be mounted on the The side of the first board close to the second board realizes touch operation. 2.根据权利要求1所述的触控模组,其特征在于,所述第一板体和所述第二板体均呈扇形状。2 . The touch module according to claim 1 , wherein the first board and the second board are fan-shaped. 3 . 3.根据权利要求1所述的触控模组,其特征在于,所述第一板体包括相对设置的第一定位板和第二定位板,所述触控组件包括设于所述第一定位板和所述第二定位板之间的活动件、以及设于所述第二定位板背离所述第一定位板的一侧的按压件,所述按压件抵触于所述活动件并可带动所述活动件移动以实现触控操作。3. The touch module according to claim 1, wherein the first plate body includes a first positioning plate and a second positioning plate oppositely arranged, and the touch component includes a The movable piece between the positioning plate and the second positioning plate, and the pressing piece arranged on the side of the second positioning plate away from the first positioning plate, the pressing piece interferes with the moving piece and can Drive the movable part to move to realize the touch operation. 4.根据权利要求3所述的触控模组,其特征在于,所述第一定位板和所述第二定位板之间设有多个限位柱,所述活动件具有主体部以及设于所述主体部的周侧上的限位部;其中,所述主体部抵触于所述按压件,所述限位部位于相邻两个所述限位柱之间。4. The touch module according to claim 3, wherein a plurality of limit posts are provided between the first positioning plate and the second positioning plate, and the movable part has a main body and a set A limiting portion on a peripheral side of the main body portion; wherein, the main body portion is in contact with the pressing member, and the limiting portion is located between two adjacent limiting columns. 5.根据权利要求3所述的触控模组,其特征在于,所述第一定位板上设有导电部,所述活动件与所述按压件采用导电材料制成;5. The touch module according to claim 3, wherein a conductive part is provided on the first positioning plate, and the movable part and the pressing part are made of conductive materials; 其中,所述导电部的一端被配置为用于实现触控操作、另一端配置为用于与所述活动件相接触。Wherein, one end of the conductive part is configured to realize a touch operation, and the other end is configured to be in contact with the movable part. 6.根据权利要求1所述的触控模组,其特征在于,所述第一板体包括相对设置的第一定位板和第二定位板,所述第一定位板具有收容槽,所述第二定位板具有孔,所述孔连通至所述收容槽;6. The touch module according to claim 1, wherein the first plate body includes a first positioning plate and a second positioning plate oppositely arranged, the first positioning plate has a receiving groove, and the The second positioning plate has a hole, and the hole communicates with the receiving groove; 所述触控组件包括设于所述收容槽内的第一部分以及穿设于所述孔的第二部分,所述第二部分在接受外力作用时可带动所述第一部分在所述收容槽内移动,以使得所述第一部分能够实现触控操作。The touch component includes a first part arranged in the receiving groove and a second part penetrated in the hole, and the second part can drive the first part in the receiving groove when receiving an external force moving, so that the first part can realize the touch operation. 7.根据权利要求6所述的触控模组,其特征在于,所述第一部分和所述第二部分均采用导电材料制成。7. The touch module according to claim 6, wherein the first part and the second part are both made of conductive materials. 8.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备系统,其特征在于,所述第二板体靠近所述第一板体的一侧设有调节件;8. The electronic equipment system according to claim 1, wherein an adjustment member is provided on a side of the second board close to the first board; 其中,所述调节件与所述第一板体间隔设置。Wherein, the adjusting member is spaced apart from the first board. 9.根据权利要求1所述的电子设备系统,其特征在于,所述安装支架还包括设于所述第一板体和所述第二板体之间的第一侧板和第二侧板,所述第一侧板和所述第二侧板分别对应于所述角部区域的所述相邻两边设置;其中,所述第一侧板和/或者所述第二侧板上设有避让口。9. The electronic equipment system according to claim 1, wherein the mounting bracket further comprises a first side plate and a second side plate disposed between the first plate body and the second plate body , the first side plate and the second side plate are respectively arranged corresponding to the two adjacent sides of the corner region; wherein, the first side plate and/or the second side plate are provided with Avoid the exit. 10.一种电子设备系统,其特征在于,包括:10. An electronic equipment system, characterized in that it comprises: 处理设备,具有触控屏;processing device, having a touch screen; 可穿戴设备,具有显示屏;以及a wearable device, having a display; and 触控模组,可拆卸地装配于所述处理设备上;a touch module, detachably assembled on the processing device; 其中,所述触控模组包括安装支架以及设于所述安装支架上的触控组件;所述安装支架包括相对设置的第一板体和第二板体,所述触控组件可拆卸地装配于所述第一板体背离所述第二板体的一侧;所述处理设备具有由所述处理设备的相邻两边围设形成的角部区域,所述角部区域设于所述第一板体和所述第二板体之间;Wherein, the touch module includes a mounting bracket and a touch component arranged on the mounting bracket; the mounting bracket includes a first board and a second board oppositely arranged, and the touch component is detachable Assembled on the side of the first board away from the second board; the processing equipment has a corner area formed by surrounding two adjacent sides of the processing equipment, and the corner area is set on the between the first board and the second board; 所述触控组件可在所述第一板体靠近所述第二板体的一侧作用于所述触控屏位于所述角部区域的部分以实现触控操作;The touch component can act on the part of the touch screen located in the corner area on the side of the first board close to the second board to realize touch operation; 所述可穿戴设备可与所述处理设备信号连接,以使得所述触控组件在作用于所述触控屏时可控制所述显示屏的显示内容。The wearable device may be signal-connected to the processing device, so that the touch component can control the display content of the display screen when acting on the touch screen.
CN202211555441.9A 2022-12-02 2022-12-02 Touch module and electronic equipment system Pending CN115793858A (en)

Priority Applications (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211555441.9A CN115793858A (en) 2022-12-02 2022-12-02 Touch module and electronic equipment system

Applications Claiming Priority (1)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
CN202211555441.9A CN115793858A (en) 2022-12-02 2022-12-02 Touch module and electronic equipment system

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
CN115793858A true CN115793858A (en) 2023-03-14

Family

ID=85473396

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
CN202211555441.9A Pending CN115793858A (en) 2022-12-02 2022-12-02 Touch module and electronic equipment system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
CN (1) CN115793858A (en)

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
US11006024B2 (en) Pop-up and rotational camera and electronic device including the same
US20210103314A1 (en) Electronic device of sliding type
US11463567B2 (en) Electronic device including camera module
EP4177717A1 (en) Foldable electronic device for controlling screen rotation, and operating method therefor
US11983355B2 (en) Electronic device comprising flexible display and operation method thereof
CN112835445A (en) Interaction method, device and system in virtual reality scene
US11799996B2 (en) Electronic device including camera pop-up structure
US12333974B2 (en) Electronic device including expandable display and content provision method
US12143708B2 (en) Method and device for photography guidance of flexible display
EP3952262A1 (en) Electronic device comprising rotating camera
US11360589B2 (en) Electronic device including flexible display and method of operating same
CN108476316B (en) A 3D display method and user terminal
US20230305670A1 (en) Electronic device comprising expandable display, and method for providing content of electronic device
US20230099993A1 (en) Electronic device comprising antenna module disposed in camera module
CN116009722A (en) Touch components, electronic equipment systems
US20230289025A1 (en) Method for controlling electronic device by using stylus, and electronic device for receiving input from stylus by using method
US12287674B2 (en) Electronic device for moving and displaying at least one object according to expansion of flexible display, and method for controlling same
CN115793858A (en) Touch module and electronic equipment system
CN115933911A (en) Touch components, electronic equipment systems
CN115857689A (en) Touch module and electronic equipment system
CN115808989A (en) Touch module, electronic equipment system
CN116009688A (en) Touch components, electronic equipment systems
CN111124240B (en) A control method and wearable device
WO2024172288A1 (en) Electronic device for providing performance content in virtual reality and control method therefor
RU2766415C1 (en) Telecommunication device (pultik)

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
PB01 Publication
PB01 Publication
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination
SE01 Entry into force of request for substantive examination